2024年11月6日发(作者:欧阳高)
DCP1 NORMAL MODE
DCP1 normal mode can be entered during a customer
job
in order to display and alter data. Control of the
5100 can then be returned
to the customer program and
execution
of the job can continue.
You can return
to the customer job after displaying or
altering data, or you can continue from normal mode
to
diagnostic mode. Once the DCP1 diagnostic mode is
initiated on the keyboard, you cannot return
to the
customer job. You can, however, choose
to go from the
DCP1 diagnostic mode to DCP2 or do a RESTART.
To load the
DCP1 normal mode:
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Press and hold the CMD key and press the -
(minus) key on the numeric keyboard.
To exit' from the DCP1 normal mode:
1. Press and hold the CMD key; then press the
+
(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.
When
DCP1 is loaded, the top eight lines on the display
are cleared, and the header
DCP1 is placed in the
middle
of both halves of the top line. The header is
repeated
in both halves of the display; it will appear
even
if the L32-64-R32 switch is set to display a
32.,.character line. The cursor flashes (or blinks)
whenever the keyboard is operational.
[
Depl
DCPl
)
'When the DCP1 normal mode is exited, the only change in
the display is the repositioning
of the cursor to the bottom of
the display screen.
3-18
/
Display
(
Display is a DCP1 normal mode function. To use this
function, you must load
DCP and then press the D key
and enter the starting address
of the location of the
read/write storage that you want to display.
The display
now shows 32 sequential locations of
read/write storage starting with the input address.
Scroll up
(t)
displays the next 16 bytes, and scroll down
(+)
displays the previous 16 bytes. The SPACE bar
returns control
to DCP1. To exit from DCP1 press and
hold the CMD key; then press the
+
(plus) key on the
numeric keyboard.
To display storage locations using a different starting
address, enter D and the new starting address.
Entry Format
(
Example:
nCPl
D 0120
ADDR
DCPl.
0120
0130
0000
OB56
0l.B2
OOl8
019C
OOIA
OOlD
0272
OlAO
0276
OIAl.
027A
0000
027E
0000
0282
Valid Input Keys
Valid
Input Keys
Calls the display function to
display read/write storage.
Scrolls forward; displays the
next 32 bytes.
Scrolls backward; displays the
previous 32 bytes.
SPACE bar
Cancels the requested fUnctidn.
To turn
off the PROCESS CHECK
light,
press the RESTART key.
Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.
D
t
CMD and
*
or
x (multiply on
the numeric
keyboard)
CMD and
+
(plus on the
numeric
keyboard)
0-9, A-F
Enters hex characters.
Returns to the customer program
if the DCP1 diagnostic mode has
not been called.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-19
Alter
Alter is a
DCP1 normal mode function. In order to use
this function, you
must first load DCP1 by holding the
CMD key and pressing the HOLD key; then hold the
CMD key and press the -(minus) key. To select the
alter function, press
A; then enter the starting address
of the location of the read/write storage you want to
alter.
After you enter a starting address, the existing contents
of 32 bytes of read/write storage are displayed on two
lines of 16 bytes each. New data can be entered on the
top line only. The display is altered with each keystroke.
Entry Format
New data is entered into read/write storage in two
ways:
• Press the EXECUTE key.
• Enter the 16th byte.
In both cases, the
top line is read/write
storage and the display is advanced one line to atlow
additional entries. This option allows you
to enter a
program that ed immediately. Pressing the
SPACE bar terminates the alter function and returns
control
to DCP1. To exit from DCP1, hold the CMD key
and press the
+
(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.
A
xxxx
Example:
DCP1
A '+000
'+000
'+010
DCP1
/
ADDR
".
j
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Valid Input Keys
Valid
Input Keys
A Calls the alter function to alter read/
write storage.
Scrolls forward and displays the next
16 bytes.
Scrolls backward
and displays the
previous 16 bytes.
EXECUTE
Enters the altered hex data into
read/write storage.
Cancels the requested function.
./
t
SPACE bar
CMD
and
*
or
x (multiply on
the numeric
keyboard)
CMD
and
+
(plus on the
numeric
keyboard)
Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.
0-9, A-F
-+
Enters hex characters.
Spaces forward.
Backspaces.
Returns to the customer program if
the
DCP1 diagnostic mode has not
been called.
+-
3-20.
(
(-
.
(/
DCP1 DIAGNOSTIC MODE
To enter DCP1 diagnostic mode, first call in the DCP1
program. Entry into diagnostic mode is made through
the keyboard by
pressing and holding the CMD key and
pressing the
*
(asterisk) or x (multiply) key on the numeric
keyboard. Entering
these keys out of sequence cancels the
requested function.
All address specifications for the various diagnostic
functions are forced
to an even halfword boundary.
Recovery from
an error is accomplished by starting the
routine over again. Recovery from a process check is
accomplished by pressing RESTART. Exit from
DCP1
diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.
DCP1 Diagnostic Mode Functions
Branch:
This function is used in the tape read tests
and, at times, when receiving plant assistance. Branch
exits
DCP1 diagnostic mode to execute code located in
executable ROS or in read/write storage.
When exiting from the diagnostic mode, the keyboard is
activated
to accept the CMD and ATTN combination.
This key combination cancels any operation and returns
control
to DCP1 diagnostic mode (unless the branch
was
to another keyboard control routine). Therefore,
when branching
to tape read or DCP2, any of the
branch operations can be cancelled.
The
BH (branch and halt) halts processing when the halt
address is reached in the instruction address register of
level 0; a shift and ATTN key combination restores the
microinstruction at the halted address and forces level 0
to a halt.
At this time, the 5100 Portable Computer should be
placed in step mode. Pressing ATTN again resumes
processing
in level 0 following completion of the step
mode in level 3. The space bar returns control
to DCP1
diagnostic mode.
Valid Branch Input Keys
BE Branch to executable ROS address.
BH Branch to read/write storage address and
halt at the specified address.
BR
Branch to read/write storage address with
no halt.
EXECUTE Execute the preceding branch instruction
and exit from the branch routine but re-
main in DCP1 diagnostic mode.
DCP1 normal mode keys are also valid in DCP1 diagnostic
mode.
Branch Display Formats
Branch in executable
ROS with no halt:
BE ROS@
xxxx
EXEC -
Branch in read/write storage with no halt:
BR MEM@
xxxx
EXEC -
Branch in read/write storage with halt:
BH MEM@
xxxx
HALT@
yyyy
EXEC -
xxxx
=
Branch address in hex.
yyyy
=
Halt address in hex.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-21
Call:
This function allows you to load the tape read test
into read/write storage for execution, and allows you to
execute the op code, read/write storage, and ROS test
routines from executable
ROS. Call also provides tape
copy
and storage dump functions.
Once DCP1 diagnostic mode is entered, use the following
keying
sequence to use the call function:
1.
Press C.
2. Hold the CMD key and press a numeric key to load
the call routines.
Use the numeric keyboard for
entering digits 0-9.
3. Press EXECUTE.
Each call routine is identified by a digit (0·9) preceded by
CMD.
The following list
shows the format for all routines and
their names:
Routine Name
CMDO Tape Read Test
CMD 1
Tape Read Test
CMD2
OP Code Loop Test
CMD3
ROS Read CRC Loop Test
CMD4 ROS Address Loop Test
CMD5
Read/Write Storage Test
CMD6
Not Assigned
CMD 7
Not Assigned
CMD8
Tape to Storage Dump
CMD 9
Storage Dump
to Tape
3·22
Tape Read Tests -CMD 0 and CMD 1
CMDO
C TAPE TEST
EXEC -
This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It
performs the same tests as the CMD 1 routine except
the forward motion and reverse motion test. Therefore,
this test provides a faster access
to the DCP2 program.
Return
to DCP1 diagnostic mode by holding CMD and
pressing ATTN. Exit DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing
RESTART.
CMD 1
C TAPE DrAG
EXEC -
This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It
also tests the forward and reverse motion. This test
provides access
to the DCP2 program. Return to DCP1
diagnostic mode by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.
Exit from
DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.
/
Loading
(
CAUTION
Do not insert the CE diagnostic cartridge until instructed
to do so on the display. The tape might be erased if
inserted too soon.
Refer
to
DCP
1 Diagnostic Mode in this section.
Hold CMD and press HOLD
(
Hold CMD and press -(minus) on the numeric
keyboard
Hold CMD and press • or x (multiply) on the numeric
keyboard
Press C
Hold CMD and press 1 on the numeric keyboard
Press
EXECUTE
You can return to DCP1 diagnostic mode from the tape
read test by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.
The tape read test is called into
read/write storage
when CMD 1 is entered. Pressing
EXECUTE starts the
test.
Some of the tests in the tape read test require answers
to questions put on the display. Follow the instructions
given and answer the questions carefully. The following
message is also displayed during some
of the tests:
PRESS EXECUTE, R, OR L
EXECUTE
=
go to next test
R
=
retry this test
L
=
loop on this test
Do NOT press EXECUTE,
R, or L until directed to do so
by the instructions.
The characters DCP2 MENU appear on the display when
the tape read test is finished.
The program can be rerun by
preSSing ATTN, entering
BR 2Boo, and pressing EXECUTE. However, once
another program is selected from the DCP2 menu, the
tape read test cannot be run unless
it is recalled from
nonexecutable ROS via DCP1.
Retry
Test
Pressing R retries the present test once.
If an error
exists after pressing
R, the following error message
appears on the display screen:
ERROR
XXX E 80 GOTO MAP 0300
Loop
On Test
If an error occurs, pressing L causes the program to
loop on the present test. After pressing L, a F (fail) or a
P (pass)
is displayed on the bottom right side of the
display screen. The F indicates that
an error exists and
. the P indicates that
an error does not exist.
To stop looping, hold CMD and press ATTN. This stops
the tape read test.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-23
Rerun Test
To run the tape read test again (since it is still in
read/write storage), do the following:
Remove the CE diagnostic cartridge
Enter
BR (branch to read/write storage)
Enter
2BOO (starting address of the tape read test)
Press
EXECUTE
Follow the instructions on the display (some loops
will not have instructions)
The
CE diagnostic cartridge must be removed before
retrying the tape read· test.
Loop
On
Error Code
A specific test within the tape read tests can be looped
I
by holding CMD, pressing ATTN, and altering location
280C
to the error number of the test (allows you to loop
on a specific test any time). Looping in this manner is
the same
as pressing L when the instruction press
EXECUT1:, R, or L is displayed.
Refer
to the tape read test and auxiliary tape MDI
routines in this section
for error numbers.
3-24
For example, to loop on error 0912:
Hold CMD and press ATTN
Remove the
CE diagnostic cartridge
Alter location
2BOC to the error number as. follows:
Press A
Enter
2BOC
Enter 0912
Press the space bar
Enter
BR 2800 (starting address of tape read
tests)
Press
EXECUTE
The tape read test will execute normally until the
test you selected is reached.
Follow the instructions on the display. Tests run prior
to
the first display will loop without displaying instructions.
Display messages:
F (fail) -error
,/
P (pass) -no error
Looping stops when you hold CMD and press ATTN.
Op Code Loop Test -CMD 2 ROS Address Loop Test -CMD 4
(
(
C OP CODE
EXEC -
This routine tests all controller microinstructions.
Numerous IAR (instruction address register) hang points
localize specific failing processor operations and monitor
C ROS ADR
EXEC -
This test sends nonexecutable ROS addresses to the
ROS adapter, reads back several halfwords of data, and
then reads back the address to verify that it advances
storage accesses at the
RDR for improper parity.
f
This test repeats until halted by the operator (if
accessed via DCP1). When accessed by the bring up
program,
it is not repeated.
ROS Read CRC Loop Test -CMD 3
C ROS READ
EXEC -
The ROS test checks if the machine can address and
fetch data from each
ROS module relating to the
language (APL or BASIC)
of the machine. While the test
runs, each byte
of data in each ROS module is read and
CRC sums are generated and compared. Compare
failures, end the test, and post
an error on the display.
Parity errors from the
ROS adapter are detected on the
bus
in to the control unit and cause a process check.
Before executing this routine, the
read/write storage
must be set
to zero at locations 0100 through 010D.
Refer
to the DCP1 alter function for the procedure. Exit
from
DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.
(
correctly. Send and read back continues until 12
different
ROS addresses are used for the selected
language (BASIC
or APL). This test loops until halted by
the operator (if called via DCP1). When called by the
bring up program,
it does not loop.
Read/Write Storage Test -CMD 5
C RAM TEST
EXEC -
This routine stores data in all locations of read/write
storage and then reads it all out and compares it one
address at a time.
It then shifts the data one position
and loops on the test.
If allowed to run, all read/write
storage addresses are tested for each possible data
combination. The
test runs until the operator stops it by
using the
CMD and ATTN key combination. Either a
process check or a customer halt condition can occur.
RFLO (register F in level 0) (refer to
Display Registers
in
this section) contains the storage location that was
being addressed at the time
of the failure. The
suspected
read/write storage card that caused the
failure
can be identified by using the following table:
0000
to 3FFF K2, K4 (read/write storage) cards
4000
to 7FFF L2, L4 (read/write storage) cards
8000
to BFFF M2, M4 (read/write storage) cards
COOO to FFFF N2, N4 (read/write storage) cards
The
read/write storage cards K2, L2, M2, and N2 are
the even addresses and card
K4, L4, M4, and N4 are
the odd addresses. Exit from
DCP1 diagnostic mode by
pressing RESTART.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·25
Tape to Storage Dump -CMD 8
C LOAD MEM@
FILE#
SELT
EXEC -
This routine can be used to load DCP2 directly from
tape
or to copy individual files.
• To load DCP2:
1. Load DCP1 -diagnostic mode.
2. Insert the CE diagnostic cartridge.
3. Enter C CMD
S.
4. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@
OSOO.
5. Enter the tape file number, FILE# 0001 (number
in hex).
6. Enter storage selection, SEL T 0000.
7. Press
EXECUTE.
S.
Enter BR
OSOO.
9. Press EXECUTE to run DCP2.
• To copy individual files or
to load a file into storage:
1. Press and hold the CMD key.
2. Press the -(minus) key.
3. Press and hold the CMD key.
4. Press the x
or
*
(multiply) key.
5. Press the C key.
6. Press and hold the CMD key.
7. Press the S key.
S. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@
OSOO.·
9. Enter the tape file number, FILE# xxxx (number
in hex).
10. Enter the storage selection, SEL T 0000.
11. Press the EXECUTE key.
The file number specified in step 9 is
now loaded in
memory starting at position
OSOO.
See
Storage Dump
to
Tape -CMD
9 in this section to load this file onto
another tape.
3-26
Storage Dump to Tape -CMD 9
C DUMP MEM@ _
END@ -
F I LE#-
TYPE-
SELT
EXEC -
This routine dumps storage from
M~M@
to END@
onto the tape cartridge, FILE# (hex),
if the TYPE is
identified. There are two types of files that can be
dumped:
Type 0011 is the tape copy function that labels the
tape file header on the tape you are copying to. This
is the same header found on t!le tape you are
copying from.
Type
OO4S is the. storage dump function that labels
the tape file header on the tape you are writing.
SEL T is the storage selection number. The SEL T for
read/write storage is 0000. The SELT for APL ROS is
0004. The SEL T for BASIC ROS is
OOOS.
The tape
receiving the dump must be marked properly.
This procedure should be used
to obtain a read/write
storage dump when submitting an MTR (microcode
trouble report), or
if you cannot obtain a storage dump
with the CMD 9 function.
The data is written in the first unused file. The file type
created is 72, which is the MTR file type.
To dump all
of the data in read/write storage to tape:
1. Insert a tape that is initialized and marked for a file
large enough
to contain the data (must be a
minimum of 16K). The tape dump program looks
for the first unused file of 16K or more.
2.
Hold CMD and press HOLD.
3.
Hold CMD and
press/
-+
(divide) key on the
numeric keyboard.
4. Displays DCP1 diagnostic mode when the
operation is complete. Press RESTART
to initialize
the 5100 Portable Computer and continue.
Tape Copy Procedure
CAUTION
You can use this procedure to copy individual files,
except 8, 9, and 15, from the CE diagnostic cartridge. If
files 8, 9, and 15 are copied, MDls 860 and 891 tests
(average velocity and peak shift head azimuth) might be
inaccurate.
To copy individual files from storage to tape, use the
following procedure:
1. The file to be copied from storage must have been
previously loaded using the CMD 8 function; or
it
must already be in the storage locations you
specify.
Press and hold the CMD
k~y.
If you are already in DCP1 diagnostic mode, go to
step 7.
Press the -(minus) key.
Press and hold the CMD key.
Press the x or
*
(multiply) key.
Press the C key.
Press and hold the CMD key.
Press the 9 key.
Enter the starting
read/write storage location,
MEM@0800.
Enter the ending read/write storage location,
END@
FFFF.
Enter the file number, FILE# xxxx (number in hex).
Enter the file type (0011
if copying from another
tape or 0048
if dumping from storage to a tape).
T 0000.
Enter the storage selection,
SEL
Press the EXECUTE key.
2.
3.
To copy
an entire tape, use the tape copy program on
the customer support cartridge. The tape copy program
is called via the PATCH program using )PATCH (APL) or
PATCH (BASIC). .
To repair individual files on a
CE diagnostic tape, use
the following procedures:
1. Use the C CMD 8 function to store the desired file
in
read/write storage at location 0800.
Insert the tape cartridge to be repaired.
Enter C CMD 9.
Enter the beginning storage location (0800) and
the end storage location
(FFFF).
Note: Error E80 010 is a normal ending error.
12.
5. Enter the tape file number in hex that was loaded
from the good tape
(0001 -001 F), and the file type
number (0011
J.
Enter the storage selection (0000).
Press EXECUTE. The sequence of C CM D 8 and
C CMD 9
can be repeated for each of the files on
the
CE diagnostic cartridge.
Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing
ATTN.
Exit from
DCP1 diagnostic mode, after copying the
tape, by pressing RESTART.
Insert the repaired tape cartridge and verify that it
is fixed.
13.
(
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.
3.
It
4.
11.
6.
14.
15.
7.
(
8.
9.
(
10.
The file that was
in the storage positions specified in
steps 10 and 11 has now been loaded on the tape in
the file number specified in step 12. This procedure, in
conjunction
with CMD 8 function, allows you to load
files into storage
from one tape and then dump them
onto another tape.
It is also useful in checking
suspected files that may contain CRe errors. By loading
the file into storage (using CMD 8), the CRC and data is
verified
for parity.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-27
To tape errors while using the customer support
cartridge that is prior
to ECS32655, use this patch to
halt the machine and display the status while running
the tape copy functions:
1.
Load the customer support cartridge.
2.
Begin the tape copy.
3.
Press the HOLD key.
4. When the machine halts, alter
OFOA to 0000.
5. Hold the CMD key down and press the
+
(plus)
key
to continue to tape copy.
6. When
an error occurs, the system will hang.
7. Display 2542-Look for current device address
(E20, E40, or ESO).
S. Display 254E-Error code (return code internal
format).
9. Display 255E-Error code (return code internal
format).
For example: Error code 1 B1 D
=
tape cmd error 002.
Refer
to the Tape
IOCB
and the 5100
Internal
Code
Chart
in section 6 of this manual.
TAPE RESIDENT PROGRAMS
This third group of diagnostic programs in the IBM 5100
Portable Computer maintenance package is
for
diagnosing I/O problems other than reading failures by
the tape unit.
If the bring up program finished without error and the
DCP1 tape read program also ran correctly, the problem
on the 5100 is probably an I/O problem. Of course, the
I/O might not be at fault if the problem is intermittent.
If an intermittent failure is suspected, DCP1 can be used
to loop on the bring up program or to rerun the tape
read program.
3·28
There are three ways to determine intermittent I/O
failures in the maintenance procedure.
1. From MAP 200.
2.
From MAP 900.
3.
Directly (in this case, you must be familiar with. the
5100 Portable Computer maintenance package and
be confident that the 5100 has
an I/O problem).
In any case, the part
of the 5100 Portable Computer
causing the failure can be found by following the
procedures in DCP2 along
with the instructions on the
display. DCP2 (the first file on the
CE diagnostic
t
cartridge) is loaded automatically into
read/write storage
at the completion of the tape read program. The various
MAPs and diagnostics integrated (M DI) (the remaining
files on the
CE diagnostic cartridge, part 160S705) are
loaded into
read/write storage by the CE using DCP2.
Diagnostic Control Program 2 (DCP2)
DCP2 controls the loading and execution
of tape
resident programs.
Loading DCP2
To load DCP2, first enter the DCP1 diagnostic mode by
doing the following steps:
1. Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.
2. Hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key on
the numeric keyboard.
3. Hold the CMD key and press the
*
or x key on the
numeric keyboard.
The words DIAG DCP1 are displayed on line 1 at this
point.
4. Press the C key.
5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the
numeric keyboard.
Note: See the CMD 0 routine in
DCPl Diagnostic
Mode in this section.
6. Press
EXECUTE.
7. Follow the instructions on the display.
(
After completing the tape read program, the first file of
the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded into read/write
storage and the following information is displayed:
DCP2
MENU
800 PRINTER MDI
820
COMMUNICATIONS/SERIAL I/O MDI
840 AUXILIARY TAPE MDI
860 TAPE WRITE MDI
(
890
DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINE CHART
ENTER THE MDI NUMBER
§fATUS:
ENTER
ENTER
'0'
IF
REPLY
THE OPTIONS
TO BE
ARE
RUN
TO BE DISPLAYED
XXX XXX is tne current EC number of this CE diagnostic cartridge.
The leftmost dash before the words
ENTER THE MOl
NUMBER TO
BE RUN flashes to indicate the position of
the next character to be entered from the keyboard. The
procedure
for entering the MOl number is found under
MOl in this section.
(
MOl (MAPs and Diagnostics Integrated)
MOl is MAPs and diagnostic programs integrated into a
single maintenance approach. MOl,
with the display and
the keyboard, allows you
to isolate machine failures by
responding
to information on the display screen.
Questions on the display require a response via the
keyboard. The MOl goes
to the next question or section
based on the keyboard input.
Loading MOl Sections
To load MOl sections, select the section from the OCP2
menu, enter the section number, and press EXECUTE.
An 0 {letter) can be entered along with the
MOl
sections number (but on the next line) to select a special
option or
to alter a previously selected special option.
Then, pressing
EXECUTE displays the MOl options.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-29
It is possible to enter and run MOl numbers not
appearing on the menu because the listed MOl sections
are subdivided into sections each having its own
number. These MOl sections are discussed
in greater
detail later. Subsections are used with some
of the
options mentioned
in the previous paragraph.
CAUTION
Entering these numbers directly runs the MOl out of its
normal sequence and. therefore. might give false results.
You should be familiar with the MOl options before
using this technique.
After you select the MOl number from the menu and
press
EXECUTE. the 5100 Portable Computer
automatically loads the MOl from the
CE diagnostic
cartridge and begins running it. As the MOl runs. the
steps
of MOl appear on the display screen.
The
MOl either runs to completion with no errors
detected and with no intervention required.
or it stops to
allow action. In this case. read the display to determine
the appropriate action. which includes the following:
Replace FRUs
Make an adjustment
Probe a logical level
Meter voltages
Exchange FRUs
Make
an observation
If a question is asked. answer it before pressing
EXECUTE
to continue. The format of the display with
several examples follows.
3-30
(
/
DCP2 Menu
MDI (MAP Diagnostic Integration)
(
Loading:
1. Select
the MDI section number from the DCP2 menu.
2. Enter
the MDI section number.
3.
Press the EXECUTE key.
This procedure loads and
automatically runs the MDI.
To stop the MDI and return to the MDI options, press the ATTN key.
The following message might appear if
the MDI halts:
ENTER Y OR N (B,
0,
T)
Y
Refers
to an answer to a specific question on the display
N
=
Yes}
=
No
screen. Enter
the appropriate answer and press the
EXECUTE key.
B
=
Back:
You can
enter B or BXX and press the EXECUTE key.
XX is the number of steps you want to back up in the
trace table.
0=
Option:
You can
enter
0
and press the EXECUTE key to display
the MDI options.
T
=
Trace:
You can
enter T and press the EXECUTE key to display
the
s~eps
that were executed along with the decision
(Y
or N) that was displayed. To obtain a
c~py
of the
trace table, press the key, press and hold the
CMD key, and press the; key.
I
I
I
MDI ran OK. Intervention required. Read
RESTART
(
"--Return to MAP
the display and take the
or
appropriate action.
press ATTN
key twice and
select
the next
MDI:
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·31
DCP2
I
MOl Options
Loading:
1.
Select the MOl section from the DCP2 menu.
2. Enter the
MOl section number:
3. Press the
#
key.
4.
Enter the letter
0
(option).
5.
Press the EXECUTE key.
The
MOl option table is now on the display screen.
Note:
The
II
key will tab to the next entry instruction.
MODE:
STEP
Halts at each step and waits until the EXECUTE key is pressed to continue.
You can change the decision
of a step by keying in Y, N, B,
0,
or T.
RUN
(default selection) Runs
MOl automatically and halts when a question
must be answered.
NEXT STEP
NO: Enter the next step number to be executed. (If you are using the
loop on path option, you must enter the
stop number here.)
LOOP ON:
STEP
Allows looping on a specified next step number.
PATH
Allows looping on a path specified by the path start number and path
stop
number. The last step in the trace must be answered yes.
MOl
Allows looping a complete
MOl section in step and run mode.
UNTI L:(Use with loop on option)
Blank Loops until the
CMD and AnN keys are pressed (used with loop
on step).
YES
Loops until a yes decision
is obtained (used with loop on step).
NO
Loops
unti.1 a no decision
DIFFERENT
Loops until a decision different from the decision established
-
.
is obtained (used with loop on step).
by the trace
is obtained (used with loop on path or MOl).
PATH START NO: Defines the path start num,ber when loop on path
is selected.
PATH STOP NO: Defines the path stop number when loop on path is selected.
3-32
I '
MDI Display Format
(-
1
MOllO
STEP NO
I
2
XXXX
3
COMMAND TEXT AREA
4
QUESTION TEXT AREA
5
FIX TEXT AREA
6
7
SUPPLEMENTARY TEXT AREA
8
9
10
11
12
13
TEST -BITS
ON
14
MASK -
0300
INSTRUCTION AREA
15
RCVO -
0700
REPLY AREA
NEXT STEP NO. -
037
16
STATUS AREA
"-
I
Line
t
The name of the MOl and the step number that is currently running.
Lines
2-13
Contains the left
32
positions of the command text from the MAP. The right
32
positions
display
the supplementary text.
Lines
14, 15, 16
Instructions, replies, and status. The instructions are usually to press EXECUTE after entering
the reply (Y, N, B, 0, or T). Y means yes, N means no. The meaning of B-back, Q·option, T-trace
is explained later under
MDI Display Replies
in this section.
Supplementary Text Area
Line 2 The MOl section number (described under
Diagnostic Run Summary Chart
in this section).
Lines
12, 13, 14, 15
The bottom right of the display screen shows the data used to make the decision. TEST defines
the type of comparison used for the decision. The comparison is made between the data
defined by
MASK and RCVO. MASK is used to refer to either expected data or a mask for bit
comparisons. RCVO refers
to the data that is returned from the section and can be data, status,
or timing information.
MASK and RCVO refer to data strings between 1 and
24
characters.
The three classes of test are:
1.
Bit comparisons (bits on, bits off, bits not on,
bits
not off) compare the RCVO data against the
bits that are on in the mask. Zero bits in the mask
are
don't care bits.
2. Magnitude comparisons (low, high, equal, not equal,
less than or equal, greater than or equal) compare
the RCVO
data against the mask.
3. Within limits compares
that the RCVO data is with-
in the upper and lower limits specified by the mask.
A yes
or no decision is made based on these results.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-33
MOl
Message
Displays
The following message is displayed when a section was
run in step mode, the results
of the section were tested,
and a decision was made by the program based on the
results. (In this case, the decision is yes.) You
can
override this decision by entering an N or can also
select one
of the other options specified. When you
press
EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and
proceeds accordingly.
1
IT[ST-
DECISION IS (Y,N,B,Q,T)
IMASK-
BITS
0300
ON
Y
I RCVIt-·
§T~TUS:
ENTER REPLY
INEXT STEP
0700
NO.-037
The following message is displayed when you must
manually answer the MOl question. You can answer yes
or no or select one of the other specified options.
When you press
EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply
and proceeds accordingly.
ENTER Y OR N (B,O,T)
§j~TUS:
ENTER REPLY
The following message is displayed when a remove,
replace, or adjust action (RRA) is required to correct the
failing
FRU or when a no trouble found (NTF) step is
reached. The reply defaults
to an 0, but one of the
other options can be selected. When you press
EXECUTE,
MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds
accordingly.
o
ENTER B,
0,
Ol~
T
§T~TUS:
ENTER REPLY
3-34
(
The following message is displayed when set up command
text is specified with an MOl test, when additional displays
of command text are required, when a GOTO STEP or
GOTO MAP is specified, or when a trace is displayed.
Pressing EXECUTE continues; however, if one of the op-
tions is entered before pressing EXECUTE, that option
is taken.
MOl Display Replies'
T
=
Trace -Displays the trace of the steps that were execu-
ted and the decision, yes
(V) no (N), associated with each
step. (A
go to step is designated by a G, where the G means
go
to a step within the same MOl.)
The trace
is erased
whe~
an MOl subsection is called. For
example,
MOl 800 has an MOl section 801. The MOl sub-
section
is called automatically as MOl 800 is executed.
But,
as you step through the MOl 800, you can see the
PRESS EXECUTE(B,O.T) TO
CONTINU~
§T~TUS:
ENTER REPLY
The following message is displayed when additional dis-
plays are needed
to show the entire trace table (256 steps
maximum). The reply defaults
to a T, but one of the
other specified options can be selected. When you press
EXECUTE,
MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds
accordingly.
ENTER T(D,D) TO CONTINUE TRACE
T
§f~TUS:
ENTER REPLY
The following message is displayed when a test is running.
You are instructed
to probe pins or .observe an opera-
tion. The diagnostic test runs until ATTN
is pressed, then
the MDI question message appears.
PRESS -ATTN-TO REPLY
~:;l
(:,
TUS:
I~UNN
I
Nei
(~/
(/
message on the display
that the MOl subsection will be
called
if you press EXECUTE. That is the last time you
can call the trace for
MAP 800 before it is erased.
While
in trace mode, 80 steps can be displayed on one dis-
play screen at a time.
If the trace contains more than 80
steps it is displayed on multiple display screens and EXECUTE
must
be pressed to page through multiple displays.
B
=
Back -Backs up one step in the MOl. A decimal num-
ber between 2 and
99 can be entered following the B to
back up more than one step at a time. Execution begins
at the step number you specified. If the number entered is
greater than the number of steps executed, the first step in
the trace is selected.
.you cannot back
out of an MOl program. If you are in
an MOl subsection, then you must return to the OCP2'menu
to return the previous MOL The previous MOl is called from
the OCP2 menu
by entering the MOl number and pressing
EXECUTE.
o
=
Option -Returns to the MOl options display so you can
enter new options. Pressing ATTN returns the OCP2 menu.
Returning Control
While the MOl is running, pressing the ATTN key returns
the
MOl option display. Pressing the ATTN key a second
time returns the OCP2 menu and pressing the ATTN key
a third time returns the
OCP1 diagnostic mode.
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-35
MDIOptions
The options are aCcessed through the MOl options display by
pressing EXECUTE. The instructions
on how to call the
MOl options are provided on the display. The exception
to this is if you are in an MOl section that does not have
the
MOl
~ptions
as one of the display replies. In that
case, press ATTN, or hold CMO and press ATTN, to get
to the MOl options display. An illustration of the MOl
options display is shown below.
CAUTION
If you are using the MOl options on MOl 840 or 844,
remove the
CE diagnostic cartridge and do not insert it
until instructed
to do so on the display. The tape might
,
J
I
be
erased if inserted too soon.
MDI OPTIONS
MODE:::
1-51'['j:L
RUN
I
NEXT STEP NO. :::. __ .... _
I-RUN -I
LOOP ON -I
. I-STEP-I
1-UNTIL
-I
PATH START NO,·=_ ......... .
I-PATH-I
I-YES-------I
1-
I-MDI -I
I-NO
I-DIFFERENT-I
-I
PATH STOP NO, = __ . __
PRESS
PRESS
-(CMD)ATTN-TO STOP LOOPING
PRESS
-ATTN-
-EXECUTE-
TO RETURN
TO CONTINUE
TO DCP2
WITH THIS MDI
STATUS: ENTER REPLY
Mode:
Defaults to run if step is not entered.
Loop On:
Loop on options are intended to diagnose inter·
mittent problems. (Pressing
HOLD while looping might
STEP -Displays the results
of each test and waits until
cause a PROCESS CHECK.)
EXECUTE
is pressed before continuing to the next test.
It
is used to step through each step in the MOL You can
STEP -Loops
on the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.
alter each decision in step mode. The
MOl remains in
until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the
step mode until manually changed
to run mode.
selected termination options of the until function is
met.
RUN -Proceeds automatically through the MOl per-
forming the designated
test and displaying the results.
PATH -Loops on the path specified by the PATH
"The run function stops and waits for EXECUTE to be
START NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIF-
pressed only when a question must be answered by the
FERENT option
is selected.
CE or when a fix is displayed.
MOl -Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT
Next Step No.:
Selects the MOl step number to be executed
option
is selected.
next. You have the option
of selecting any step within the
MOl (001-nnn). If an invalid step number is entered, an
error message
is displayed.
3-36
Until:
Looping termination options. Blank, YES, and NO
should
be
used with loop on STEP. DIFFERENT should
(
be
used with loop on PATH or loop on MOL These options
are recognized only when one
of the loop on options is
selected.
Blank (option field left blank) -Loops until
CMD and
ATTN are pressed, then returns
the MOl options to the
display screen.
YES -Loops until a yes decision for a diagnostic test
is obtained, at which time the screen describing the
current
MOl step is displayed, or until CMD and ATTN
are pressed giving the same results
as blank.
(
NO -Same as YES except loops until obtaining a no
d~cision
for a diagnostic test.
DIFFERENT -First a trace must be defined by pro-
ceeding through
the desired sequence of steps in the
MOl or path. Then the program loops on the predeter-
mined sequence of steps until the current sequence,
varies from
the predetermined sequence. When the loop
terminates, the last valid step of the sequence is dis-
played along with
the decision that varied. Question
steps are assumed
to have the same response each time
through
the loop as they had when the initial trace was
defined; therefore,
they do not have to be answered
each time.
Path Start No:
Defines the beginning step of the path.
Path
Stop
No:
Defines the ending step of the path.
(
Stepping and Looping
Step Through MOl
MODE
=
STEP
STEP -Displays the results
of each test and waits until
EXECUTE
is pressed before continuing to the next test.
It
is used to step through each step in the MOl. The CE
can alter each decision in step mode. The MOl remains
in step mode until manually changed to run mode.
NEXT STEP NO.
=
XXX
Loop On Step
MODE
=
STEP
STEP -Loops on
the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.
until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the selec-
ted termination options of the until function
is met.
NEXT STEP NO.
=
XXXX
LOOP ON-STEP
UNTIL-blank, YES,
NO, DIFFERENT
5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-37
Loop On Path
PATH -Loops
on the path specified by the PATH START
NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIFFERENT option is
selected.
Answer the questions exactly as they were answered
on
the initial pass through the path.
No intervention is required for the program to loop con-
tinuously. Howevet, a trace
of the desired sequence of
steps must first be created by proceeding through the path
before
the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The
DIFFERENT option uses the trace table
as a guide.
To use the loop
on PATH until DIFFERENT option:
1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,
enter the selected
MOl number along with 0 for
options, and press EXECUTE. This initializes the
trace.
2. Enter STEP mode, then enter the path starting step
number into NEXT STEP
NO.
3. Press EXECUTE. This begins execution of the step
selected by NEXT STEP NO.
4. Proceed through the path steps answering those steps
that require intervention until you reach the desirecl
path stopping step. This builds
the trace of the steps
in the path. The last step must be answered yes.
5. Press ATTN
to return to the MOl options.
6. Enter:
RUN mode
NEXT STEP
NO. (use PATH STOP NO.)
loop on PATH until DIFFERENT
PATH START
NO.
PATH STOP NO.
7. Press EXECUTE to begin looping.
8. Press
(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to
the MOl OptiONS display where new options can
be
selected. To resume looping, press EXECUTE with-
out changing the options.
9. Looping stops
if the sequence of step execution
deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed
step
is displayed along with the decision that varied.
The looping options are cleared automatically so
that
pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error
that occured.
3-38
Loop On MOl
MOl
-Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT
option
is selected.
Answer
the questions exactly as they were answered on the
initial pass through the MOL
No intervention is required for the program to loop con-
tinuously. However, a trace of
the desired sequence of
steps must first be created by proceeding through the
MOl
before the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The
DIFFERENT option uses the trace table
as a guide.
To use the loop on MOl until DIFFERENT option:
1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,
enter the selected MOl number, and press EXECUTE.
This initializes the trace and begins running the
MOL
2. Proceed through the MOl answering the steps that
require intervention until the last step in the MOl is
reached. This builds the trace of the sequence of
steps that were executed. The last step must be
answered yes.
3. Press T and EXECUTE
to display the trace table.
Record the first and last steps from
the trace table
for the
MOl being run.
j
4. Press ATTN
to return to the MOl options.
5. Enter:
RUN ,mode, (do not change the NEXT STEP NO.)
loop on MOl until DIFFERENT
6. Press EXECUTE
to begin looping.
7. If looping does not start, repeat steps 2 through 6.
8. Press
(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to
the MOl options where new options can be selected.
To resume looping, press EXECUTE without chang-
ing the options.
9. Looping stops
if the sequence of step execution
deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed
step
is displayed along with the decision that varied.
The looping options are cieared automatically so
that
pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error
that occurred.
MOl Subsections 890 Diagnostic Sections
The printer, auxiliary tape, and diagnostic sections MDls
on the DCP2 menu, are subdivided into individually
numbered subsections. These are especially useful
with
the MDI options previously described. In addition, they
can be entered directly into the DCP2 menu.
CAUTION
Entering MDI subsection numbers directly into the DCP2
menu runs
the MDI out of its normal sequence and can
These diagnostic sections allow you to select individual
MDI sections for diagnosing intermittent problems. The
diagnostic sections are normally run automatically under
control
of the MDI supervisor when tape write, printer,
auxiliary tape, and communications
MDI function MAPs
are executed. They can be run individually
by using the
diagnostic sections (890) and the following loading
instructions.
cause erroneous results.
(
A list
of the MDls and their subsections follows:
800 5103 Printer MDI Exercisor
801 Error Determination
802 Error Determination
803 Error Determination
804 Error Determination
805 Error Determination
820 Communications/Serial
I/O MDI
No MDI subsections
840 Auxiliary Tape
MDI
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
860 Tape Write MDI
861
890 Diagnostic Sections
891
892
893
894
(~.
Loading Instructions:
Load Diagnostic
DCP1 :
1.
Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.
2.
Hold the CMD key and press
the -(minus) key
on the numeric keyboard.
3.
Hold the
CMD key and press the
*
or x key on
the numeric keyboard.
The words DIAG
DCP1 are displayed on line 1 now.
4.
Press the C key.
5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the
numeric keyboard.
Note: See the CMD 0 routine in DCP1.
6.
Press EXECUTE.
7.
Follow the instructions on the display.
5100 Diagnostics Overview, 3-39
After the tape read programs are completed, the first
file of the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded and the
OCP2 menu is displayed.
8. Select 890 from the OCP2 menu.
9. Press EXECUTE.
10. MOl allows the selection of the subsection
function (tape write, printer, auxiliary tape,
or
communications) to be exercised. Reply to the
appropriate question and press
EXECUTE.
11. The first step of each chart (MOls 891-894)
displays the section number, a brief description,
and the calling step number
of each diagnostic
section available. The calling step number is
also listed with each diagnostic section
description that follows later
in this section.
Record the step number listed
for the specified
diagnostic section, press
0
(option) and press
EXECUTE
to display the MOl options.
12. Enter
STEP, the step number as recorded in
number
11 above, and one of the loop on
options. Press
EXECUTE to begin.
13. The diagnostic section displays status
and/or
data as described under
MOl Display
Format.
Expected data or status is usually all
0' s to
force a Y decision for the MOl step. All N
decisions should be overridden by the operator
by keying in a Y
or an 0 (option) to avoid
running
an unwanted diagnostic section. Keying
in
an 0 to override either a Y or an N allows
immediate selection
of another diagnostic
section step or allows a looping option within
the same chart. A Y decision goes
to the first
step
of the chart to allow selection of another
diagnostic section step number. Return
to 11
above.
14. To stop, hold CMO and press ATTN. The MOl
options are displayed. Option and step numbers
can be selected
if desired. Pressing ATTN
again returns the
OCP2 menu.
3-40
,
,--
/
/
Diagnostic Program Routines
(
Routine numbers are displayed on the CRT during step
mode and, in many cases, during normal run mode. You
can use the routine numbers
in two ways:
1.
To locate (using MOl step mode) and loop on a
step within a specific test. You can do this using
the
MOl procedures.
2. To locate a specific test via MOl 890.
The following chart provides
an explanation of the test
and also shows the MOl 890 step number. Step
numbers are also displayed while running MOl 890.
(
(
(/
Diagnostic Program Routines 3-41
TAPE READ TEST AND AUXILIARY TAPE
DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES
These routines are used in MOls 840 through 847 and
MOl 893. The routine numbers
are the numbers used in
MDls 840 through 847. All tests with error codes return
0000.
Routine
Number Description Error Code Meaning
,
1
TR01
I.
TR02
TR06
TR07
3-42
Select subdevice test. This test is run as the first test in 0901 Failure of the F reset
MDls 840-847 and should be run in 893 before any other
command.
test. The first time this test is run
it asks you to enter the
subdevice address
with minimal error checking. Therefore.
because you enter the subdevice address.
840-847 and 893
can be run on any tape subdevice.
0903 Failure
of the subdevice
select command.
0906 Improper response
of the
subdevice.
Loop write read (LWR)
of data to the base I/O card only. 0909 Incorrect data read back.
for tape read test. and LWR of data to the tape adapter card
for auxiliary tape test.
Returns
to the MOl section the last error code that occurred 0954
Neither BOT nor
EOT status
when TR061 was run. This test is used only
in the auxiliary
is active.
tape tests.
not in tape read program.
0957
EOT status is not active.
0958
EOT status cannot be
cleared.
0960 BOT status is
not active.
0963
The load point hole (BOT
status) cannot be found (refer
to 229
for load point hole).
0966 BOT status cannot be
cleared.
Reads and compares file 1 on the diagnostic tape for correct 0994
Data read is not correct.
data using the
I/O supervisor.
Error codes 0009 and 0010 are used
to determine the end of 0001-0008 See error codes and halt
file 1 and indicate correct operation. Tape read branches
to 0011-0014 conditions in this section.
OCP2 if the operation is correct.
'
j
Routine
Number Description
Error Code Meaning
(~
(
r
"
(
(
(
TR08
Tests interrupts
from the tape control card. 0907
TR10 Returns the last error code that occurred
to the MOl section.
0982
This test is used only in the auxiliary tape tests, not in tape
read program.
0983
0985
0986
0987
0988
0989
TR39 Determines if the diagnostic mode line is active when it 0939
should not
be active. If it is active, eight read clocks are
generated by the tape control card, which,
in turn, causes an
interrupt from the base I/O (F2) card when one is not
expected.
TR40 Checks to determine if the tape clock line and write enable 0940
line become active and
that the read clock line is not an
open circuit. Every time the write enable line shifts, the read
clock line should pulse and cause an interrupt from the base
I/O (F2) card.
TR43
Checks the diagnostic mode line by changing it between 0943
write and read operations.
TR46 Tests the missing interrupts
for wrap through read/write 0946
head. This tests the tape control card detector circuits. The
select channel line is changed between channel 0 and
channel 1 ten times and
at least three interrupts must occur.
Interrupts occurred
incorrectly.
Status Error -Beginning of
tape status active once, but
not active now.
Read Data Error -No
interrupt (read clock)
detected.
from either tape track.
Read Data Error -No
interrupt (read clock) detected
from tape track 0 (format
track).
Read Data Error -No
interrupt (read clock) detected
from tape track 1 (data
track).
Read Data Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) detected on
tape track 0 (format track).
Read Data Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) detected on
tape track 1 (data track).
Read Dsta Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) on either tape
track.
An interrupt occurred.
No interrupts occurred.
No interrupts occurred.
Less than three interrupts.
Diagnostic Program Routines 343
Routine
Number
TR47
Description
E"or Code
Meaning
All 1's or O's read from tape
control card.
/--
Checks the read data line to determine if it will go both 0947
-active and inactive. The program generates 10 read clocks
on the tape cOhtrol card
and reads the data associated with
th~se
read clocks .. There must be at least one 0 bit and one
t
bit read for this test to pass. A stuck bit causes all1's or.
all O's to be 'read.
Moves tape forward for two seconds. 0970
"'--
TR051
1
BOT or EaT was found; use
TR051 or TR052 routines to
reposition the tape.
"'--_/
TR052
1
TR06P,
Moves tape backward for two seconds.
Checks the beginning (BOT) and end (EOn of tape status
0954
indicators. The tape is moved past the single BOT holes and
the double
BOT/EaT holes.
If the test fails, the tape stops immediately.
0957
0958
0960
0963
EaT status is not active.
EaT status cannot be
cleared.
BOT status is
not active.
The load point hole (BOT
status) cannot be found (refer
to 229 for load point hole).
/
Neither BOT nor
EaT status
is active.
~~"
'.
0966
CAUTION
If an error occurs and the test is retried, the tape might 'go
off the end of the reel.
TR73
2
Tests the tape speed to determine if the motor speed is 0973
correct. The program rewinds the tape to the first set of
double holes and counts the time. When the load point hold
is found, the time is compared.
Remove the tape cartridge from the tape unit and attach a
jumper between tape control card pin U06
(-write enable)
and pin U08 (gnd). Wraps data through the base I/O card
and tape control card.
0995
BOT status cannot be
cleared.
-"
,
Tape speed not close to 40
inches per second.
TR95
The data returned was
incorrect.
0996
Indicates
that TR95 ran and
can be rerun by pressing
EXECUTE.
'If a 970 error results from the EOT hole t?eing in front of the tape mirror, manually move the tape to reposition the EOT hole.
2Looping on this test can cause a process check.
3-44
(,
(
Routine
Number
TR101
Description
Determines if both tape tracks return interrupts and if the
sync byte (hex
E7) can be read from both tracks.
Error Code
0982
Meaning
Status Error -BOT status
active once, but not active
now.
Read Data Error -No
interrupt (read clock) detected
from either tape track.
Read Data Error -No
0983
0985
C~
0986
0987
0988
0989
l(
TR0312 Cartridge in place status (10) should not
be present. 0912
TR0315 File protect status (02) should be present. 0915
TR0318
LED on status (04) should be present.
0918
TR0321 BOT status (01) should
not be present; that is, sense bit (01) 0921
should
be on.
TR0324 EOT status (SO) should not be present. 0924
TR0327
Erase active (08) status should not be present.
0927
TR0330 Erase active (08) status for track 0 (format track) should be
0930
(.
present.
Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.
(j
interrupt (read clock) detected
from tape track 0 (format
track).
Read Data Error -No
interrupt (read clock) detected
from tape track 1 (data
track).
Read Data Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) detected on
tape track 0 (format track).
Read Data Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) detected on
tape track 1 (data track).
Read Data Error -No sync
byte (hex
E7) on either tape
track.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Bad sense bit found.
Diagnostic Program Routines 3-45
Routine
Number Description, Error Code Meaning
TR0333
Erase
activ~(08)
status for track 1 (data track) should be 0933 Bad sense bit found.
present.
Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.
0936
Bad sense bit found.
TR0336
Select magnet active status (20) should not be
present.
TR0337
Select magnet active status
(20) for forward tape motion
0937
Bad sense bit found.
should be present,
Note: This test leaves the forward tape and select magnet
active commands on.
TR0338 Select magnet active status (20) for reverse tape motion 0939 Bad sense bit found.
should be present.
Note:
This test leaves the reverse tape and
select magnet active commands on.
,TR0348
Cartridge in place status (10) should be present.
0948
Bad sense bit found.
TR0349
File protect status (02) should be present.
0949
Bad sense bit found.
TR0350
EOT status (80) should not be present.
0950
Bad sense bit found.
3-46
/"
'~/
t
/
TAPE WRITE ROUTINES
(~
These routines are used in MOl 860. The routine
numbers are the numbers used in MOl 860.
XS
in the
chart mean any number.
(
Routine
Number
BT01
Description
Average Velocity Test -Positions
the tape
to the file containing 1's
Expected
Information
Error
Code
Meaning
The average speed is computed to
two decimal points and returned as a
xxxx
XXXX
Average Deviation
f
and then begins the bit timing
Velocity Number
analysis test.
BT02
Acceleration Test -Checks the
xxxx
speed
of the tape from stop to
1500 bits after the tape has
reached 20 inches per second.
Graph
BT03 Deceleration Test -Checks the
xxxx
speed
of the tape for the 1040 bits
after the drop
of the run line. This
speed should be less than 20
inches per second.
Graph
(
4-digit decimal number in inches per
second. For example, a received
number
of 4006 is actually 40.06
inches per second. The average
speed is taken from the average
of
9,192 bit times. The deviation number
is returned
as the third and fourth
bytes.
The speed at bit 800 is computed
to
two decimal points and returned. as a
4-digit decimal number in inches per
second. If the speed is not within the
range
of 38.1 to 41.9 inches per
second for bits 800 to 1500, then that
speed
is returned.
The speed
of the 1500 bits is
displayed
in a graph. The speed in
inches per second is the vertical axis
and the 1500 bits are the horizontal
axis.
Each asterisk
(*)
on the graph
represents the average speed
of 36
bits on tape.
The speed at bit 1040
is returned as
a 4-digit decimal number computed
to two decimal points in inches per
second.
A graph
of the speed of the 1040 bits
is displayed. The speed
in inches per
second is the vertical axis and the
1040 bits are the horizontal axis.
Each asterisk
(*)
on the graph
represents the average speed
of 26
bits on tape.
Diagnostic Program Routines 3-47
Routine
Number Description
BT06
Erase Data on Both Tracks
Expected
Information
Error
Code Meaning
/
~
/
XXXXXXXXXXXX
(six 2-digit error
codes)
00-14 The program returns six error codes
of two digits each. The first four error
codes are expected
to be 00. If they
are not 00, they are the system error
codes,
02-14. Refer to
Error
Codes in
this section.
r---"
~
BT11 Peak Shift-Head Azimuth Test on
> to > Track 0 using a prewritten pattern (4-digit decimal of O's and 1's from file 15 -This number computed to test searches to file 15, then reads two decimal places) the data on track 0 in 10 bit timing analysis mode. Speed differences between the odd and even bits should not exceed 10.0 microseconds. BT21 Acceleration Test for Customer > Media -This test goes to file 1 and does the acceleration test using BT02. 348 The first error code is from a search to file 30. The second error code is from a mark command to mark two files of two records each. The third error code is from another search to file 30 and a write header command to this file. The fourth error code is from a write and read of data to file 30. The fifth error code is from a read of the data on file 30 after it was erased during the read operation. This error code should be 09. This is the first error code expected to be other than 00. The sixth error code is from a search for file 30 after the format track is erased. This error code should be 04. The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 0 in microseconds (see BT34). The average speed is computed to two decimal points and returned as a 4-digit decimal number in inches per second. For example, a received number of 4006 is actually 40.06 inches per second. The average speed is taken from the average of 9,192 bit times. The deviation number is returned as the third and fourth bytes. '-- .. ' j / ". /' Routine Number Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning ( BT22 Sense Test XX BT23 Write Read Test -Writes and XXX ... XX (up to reads the data in the MASK field twelve 2-digit bytes) on the display onto tape. ( f BT30 Peak Shift Test on Track 1 - > to > Returns the track 1 data generated (4-digit decimal during routine BT48. BT48 runs number computed to now if it was not run previously. two decimal places) BT31 Symmetry Test on Track 1 - > to > Returns the track 1 data generated (4-digit decimal during routine BT47. BT47 runs number computed to now if it was not run previously. two decimal places) ( BT34 (See note) Return Oata to MOl for Test Spec Function -This test is not an MOl routine but a subroutine of BT47, BT48, BT30, and BT31. This test generates an even average number and puts it into the first 4 digits of the MASK. A high number is generated by adding the permissible difference to the low average number and putting this in the last 4 digits of the MASK. The program also :( generates an odd average number into the RCVO. Bits: T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Odd average = average of T1, T3, T5, etc (/ Even average = average of T2, T4, T6, etc Note: Not accessible from MOl (' Returns the sense byte from the tape unit. Returned data is the correct data if there is no error, or the first data to miscompare if there is an error. For example, if the data 012345 is the expected data, 012345 ... , for a total of 512 bytes is written onto tape, where 01 is one byte, 23 the next byte and 45 the next byte, then repeat. If the data on tape is ABCOEF, ABCOEF is returned as RCVO on the display so that all 512 bytes need not be displayed. The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 1 in microseconds (see BT34). The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 1 in microseconds (see BT34). All data is in decimal microseconds. For example, if the averages calculated are 33.00 (even average) and 34.05 (odd average) and the permissible difference is 3.0, the information displayed is: TEST -Within limits MASK -3300-3600 RCVO - 3405 Diagnostic Program Routines 3,49 Routine Number BT35' Description EOT Hardware Stop Test -This test is similar to TR061 in the auxiliary tape and tape read routines. The difference is that the time~outs are different to make sure that the EOT stop hard works. Expected Information Error Code Meaning No errors. /- ' ..... 0000 0954- 0966 See TR061 for explanation of possible error codes. No errors. "'-_/ I BT36 Test Bit Timing Hardware (no tape 0000 J cartridge inserted) -This rest ~- requires two jumpers to run and the tape cartridge must not be inserted attach jumpers on tape control card pin B08 to pin S05, and pin U06 to pin U08. The test writes data, therefore it erases the tape. The test determines if the bit timing hardware produces correctly timed interrupts. 0811 Not enough interrupts occurred. 0812 Inte~rupt J times are incorrect. BT37 Check System and Diagnostic Error XXXXXXXX(two The last two error codes that were Code -Error codes are generated 4-digit error codes) given are returned by this program as by the programs each time they an 8-digit number. are run. This test is used to clarify previous errors. No hardware is The first 4 digits are the last system exercised by this routine. error code (02-14, see Error Codes in this section). The last 4 digits are the last error codes from the tape write routines (0800-0960 as described in the error code column of this chart). BT47 Symmetry Test on Track 0 - > to > The data (see BT34) returned is the Searches to file 30 and writes (4-digit decimal even average and odd average bit zeros on both tracks. The test then number computed to times for track 0 in microseconds. reads the data on both tracks in bit two decimal places) timing analysis mode. The permissible difference in speed between the odd and even bits should not be more than 3.0 microseconds. , Looping on this test can cause a process check. 3-50 r---" ',- ./ / C Routine Number BT48 Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 0 in microseconds (see BT34). Peak Shift Test on Track 0 -This xxxx to XXXX (4-digit decimal test is similar to BT47 but writes an alternating pattern of O's and number computed to 1's. The permissible difference of two decimal places) the O's and 1's can be a maximum of 8 microseconds. C' BT51 Erase Coils Open Test f TR01 Select Subdevice Test -This test is used in MAP 891 (auxiliary tape). It is not used for MAP 860. This test must be run before 891 is run on auxiliary tape. This test must also be run if the operator ever If returns to the DCP2 menu during MAP 891. The first time this test is run it asks you to enter the subdevice address with minimal error checking; therefore, 891 can be run on any tape subdevice. (-- ( 0000 No errors. 0808 Status bit 5 is on after an F reset instruction. 0809 Status bit 5 is on after a hex F7 control instruction command (erase channel 0). 0810 Status bit 5 is on after a hex FB control instruction command (erase channel 0). Status bit 5 indicates LED and erase coils OK. 0000 No errors. 0901 F reset failure on a get microinstruction. The status was other than FF after an F reset instruction. 0903 Subdevice select failure. The expected status bit was not active. 0906 Improper response from the selected subdevice. The expected subdevice response status was not active. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-51 5103 PRINTER DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES These routines are used in MOts 800 through 805. The routine numbers are the numbers used in MDts 800 through 805. The expected information column in the chart contains the following types of information: SA= Status byte A SB= Status byte B Device Address Bits 4-7 Device Name Bits 8-15 Definition 5 Printer If Ry is even, status byte A 8 Print emitter latch 3 9 Print emitter latch 2 10 Print emitter latch 1 11 Wire check or not ready 12 Forms emitter B 13 Forms emitter A 14 Not end of forms 15 Left margin switch or not ready If Ry is odd, status byte 8 = B· Print motor latch B (0 9 = not B) Print motor latch A (0 not A) 10 Print emitter interrupt 11 Not ready interrupt 12 Forms motor latch B (0 = not B) 13 Forms motor latch A (0 = not A) 14 80 cps = 0, 120 cps = 1 15 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) or, 1.1 rns or 3.3 ms (80 cps) timer interrupt EC = Error code An error code is a 2-digit decimal number described under Error Codes in this section. PLFP = Print line failure position The print line failure position is a 4-digit decimal number between 0001 and 0132. TS = Test status Test status is either 00 or FF. 00 indicates a test failure and FF indicates a pass. 3-52 ( (" ( Routine Number Description PT03 Expected Information Error Code Meaning Returns status bytes A and B. Turns off (resets) forms motor XX XX latch A and forms motor latch B in SA SB the printer adapter card (B1A2). Turns on forms motor latch A. Turns on forms motor latch B. PT04 PT05 XX SA XX SB Returns status bytes A and B. XX SA SB Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B. XX PT06 PT07 PT08 Turns on forms motor latch A and forms motor latch B. Gets Status. XX SA XX SB XX SA XX SB Spaces forms in increments of XX XX 1/16 of a line. Sixteen increments SA SB are spaced (one line). Detects open forms predriver lines or an open forms stepper motor winding. Checks the 2.66 ms (120 cps) timer or the 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer in the printer adapter card. XX EC 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B. error code. PT09 XXXX 0240-0284 (120 cps) 0310-0341 (SO cps) Returns a four-digit number in the RCVD data location as the interval between timer pulses. A decimal is implied between the second and third digits. Returns a four-digit number in the RCVD data location as the interval between timer pulses. A decimal is implied between the second and third digits. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. C PT10 Same as PT09 except checks the 1.1 ms timer. XXXX 0102-0114 PT11 PT12 PT13 Turns print motor latch A and print XX XX motor latch Bon. SA SB Turns the print motor latch Bon. Turns print motor latch A on. XX SA XX SB XX SA XX SB ( PT14 PT15 Turns off print motor latches A and XX XX B. SA SB Turns off the forms go and print go latches that disable the two printer motors. Same as PT15 except status is returned after 300 ms delay. XX SA XX SB ( PT15A XX SA XX SB Returns status bytes A and B. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-53 Routine Expected Number Description Information I PT16 Gets and saves status bytes A and XX XX B the first time it is called and SA SB returns that status on all subsequent calls. PT20 Prints four lines of alternating Hs XX XX XX and blanks. Terminates early if an SA SB EC error code occurs. PT21 Ripple Print with Underscore - XX· XX XX Prints one line of all characters SA SB EC without underscore and one line of all characters with underscore. Terminates early if an error occurs. PT23 Staggered Print Test -Prints Hs in XX XX XX an ever expanding pattern until 132 SA SB EC Hs are printed in a single line. Terminates early if an error occurs. PT26 Gets the last error code value. XX EC PT01V6 Spaces forms six lines and repeats XX XX XX this sequence six times (36 lines). SA SB EC PT01V15 Spaces forms 15 lines and repeats XX XX XX this sequence 6 times (90 lines). SA SB EC PT17V1 Drives the print head carrier to the XX XX right margin, then ramps. If an SA SB error occurs, the routine gets the XX XXXX status, issues a ramp command, EC PLFP and terminates. PT17V10 Same as PT17V1 except repeats XX XX 10 times. SA SB XX XXXX EC PLFP PT25V1 Left Margin Timing Test -Moves XX XX carrier to the .right 3.3 inches (83.8 SA SB mm), then ramps. Checks to XX XX determine if left margin drops EC TS between print emitters 1 and 2. Terminates the routine and causes TS (test status) to be 00 if an error occurs. 3-54 Error Code Meaning Returns saved status bytes A and B. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and Band aFI error code. 50-59 Returns an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns two status bytes and an error code. All other M Dis return only an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. All other MOls return only an error code. 50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B, error code, and print line position of the print head where the failure occurred. All other MDls return EC and PLFP. 50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B, error code, and print line position of the print head where the failure occurred. All other MOls return EC and PLFP. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. ( "-... / ........../ ~ ... '", . / ' ;- ' . .... -/ Routine Number Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning (- PT25V5 Same as PT25V1 except repeats XX XX five times if there are no errors. SA SB XX XX EC TS ( PT25V10 Same as PT25V1 except repeats XX XX 10 times if there are no errors. SA SB XX XX EC TS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER/SERIAL I/O ADAPTER PROGRAM AND DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES When the Communications Adapter/Serial I/O Adapter features are installed, the diagnostic program provides: • A test of all of the status and control circuitry on the expansion feature card. The test further isolates problems to either the 5100 Portable Computer or customer provided data set/communications facility. • A test of the long space interrupt and the timer interrupt of the Communications Adapter feature. The long space interrupt detects an end of transmission request form the remote facility. The timer interrupt controls the data sampling and data transmission rates. , r 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. • A test of the timer interrupt of the Serial I/O Adapter feature. The timer interrupt controls the data sampling and data transmission rates. • A test for each of the interrupt sources, both for the ability to set the interrupt via the hardware and reset the interrupt via the microcode. • Data tests of various bit combinations that isolate problems between the 5100 Portable Computer and customer provided modem/communications facility using a manually attached wrap connector to further isolate problems to the defective FRU in the 5100. The diagnostic routines are used in MOl 820. The routine numbers shown in the following chart are used in MOl 820. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-55 Routine Returned Information Number Description Status Data (hex) Meaning Routines COMOO through COM25 test the communications Adapter feature. Neither the data set nor the wrap connector needs to be attached for routines CO MOO through COM05. CO MOO Resets the expansion feature card. COM01 Returns communications status. XX One byte of sense status. COM02 Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 Good test. mode. COM03 Tests 134.5 bps timer interrupt 96 0200 through Good test. rate. 02F2 Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred. COM04 Tests 300 bps timer interrupt rate. 96 0147 through Good test. 014E Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred.' COMOS Tests 1200 bps timer interrupt rate. 96 0381 through Good test. 0399 Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred. The communications wrap connector must be attached for routines COM06 through COM10. COM06 Tests for long space interrupt EF 1886 through Good test. when long space received with 1800 terminal ready set. 00 61A8 No interrupt occurred. COM07 Tests for inactive long space 00 Good test. interrupt when continuous mark received with terminal ready set. COM08 Tests for inactive long space 00 Good test. interrupt when short space received with terminal ready set. COM09 Tests that long space interrupt 87 Good test for communications reset command resets the interrupt adapter. level and long space interrupt status. 96 Good test for Expansion feature. 3-56 / / "'-- / Routine Returned Information (- Number Description Status COM10 Tests that the Expansion feature 86 reset command resets the interrupt level and long space interrupt status. 96 ( COM11 Tests that alternating bit patterns can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM12 Tests that all O's pattern can be ( transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM13 Tests that all 1's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM14 Tests for timer interrupt when start 97 bit received while in receive mode. COM15 Tests for inactive timer interrupt 00 when no start bit received while in receive mode. COM16 Tests that dropping out of receive 00 mode after a start bit is received prevents a timer interrupt. ij ,-<; ' " COM17 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt 00 when a short start bit is received while in receive mode with the start bit check enabled. COM18 Tests that a receive data bit can be 86 set and that the Expansion feature reset command resets it. 96 03 COM19 Tests that data set ready and clear E6 ( to send status bits can be set. F6 ( Data (hex) 10 bytes of AA 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes or E2 10 bytes of 00 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 10 bytes of FF 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 Meaning Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Good test. Good test. Good test. Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Bit cannot be set. Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-57 Data set must be attached for routines COM20 through COM25. These routines test the communications network. The status is displayed on the bottom line. COM20 through COM25 routines are used in MOl 894 only. Routine Number COM20 COM21 Description Transmits solid mark. Transmits solid space. Comments Causes line disconnect if either' the transmitting or receiving data set is strapped for a long space disconnect. COM22 COM23 COM24 COM25 Transmits 300 bps alternating bit pattern. Transmits 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern. Receives and analyzes 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern. Receives and analyzes 300 bps alternating bit pattern. Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with decimal numbers. Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with decimal numbers. Routine Number Description Returned Information Status Data (hex) Meaning Routines 51001 through 51015 test the Serial I/O Adapter feature. Neither the I/O device nor the wrap connector needs to be attached for routine 51001 through 51006 51001 51002 51003 Returns serial I/O adapter status. XX One byte of sense status. Good test. 21 CA through 21E8 2710 1681 through 169F 2710 DB 38 through OB56 2710 0009 2710 Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. ." .. / Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 mode. Tests FFFF timer interrupt rate constant. Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 96 00 96 00 96 00 96 00 51004 Tests AAAA timer interrupt rate constant Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 51005 Tests 5555 timer interrupt rate constant. Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 51006 Tests 004F timer interrupt Data is the rate in tens of p.s. r' 3-58 ( ( (' Routine Number Description Returned Information Data (hex) Status Meaning The serial I/O adapter wrap connector must be attached for routines 51007 through 51014. 51007 51008 Tests that data set ready and clear F6 to send status bits can be set. Tests that alternating bit patterns can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests that all O's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests that all 1's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests for inactive timer interrupt 00 when no start bit received while in receive mode. Tests for timer interrupt when start 97 bit received while in receive mode. Tests that dropping out of receive mode after a start bit is received prevents a timer interrupt. 10 bytes of AA 10 bytes of E1 1 0 bytes of E2 10 bytes of 00 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 10 bytes of FF 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 Good test. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good Test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. 51009 51010 51012 51011 51013 Good test. Good test. 00 t 51014 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt 00 when a short start bit is received while in receive mode with the start bit check enabled. Good test. The serial I/O adapter wrap connector should not be attached for routine 51015. Probe pin 8 on the serial I/O connector. 51015 Tests the '+receive line signal detector' signal line. The CE probe UP light should be on. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-59 Error Codes The CE diagnostic error codes are 800 through 999. Refer to Diagnostic Program Routitles in this section for the error codes and their meanings. The following list of error codes are hardware related only. The BASIC or APL language error codes are in the APL or BASIC reference manual. The display format for hardware error codes is ERROR xxx yu. and is displayed on line 15 of the display. The xxx represents the error code, y represents the failing device, and zz represents the subdevice address. 'The subdevice address allows the 5100 to distinguish ,between I/O devices using the same device address, as in the case of the internal and auxiliary tape units. The subdevice address can be one of many addresses depending on the number and type of subdevices attached. The subdevice addresses for the tape units are: Internal tape unit -80 Auxiliary tape unit - 40 / Customer Error Code Descriptions ( Device ( Tape :( '~ 'J .';" ,( (~~ f." Error Code Description Device Error Address Subdevice xx y Address zz 002 E 'Z2. Invalid command for device or invalid sequence for device - Incorrect device address or file number specified by the user. 003 E z:z. Status error -Incorrect status sensed. The most recent status byte is located at address hex 008F (refer to Status under Tape Adapter I/O Lines in Section 4). 004 E zz Time-out -Data cannot be found on tape, or a rewind operation exceeded three minutes. (Data might not be found if the tape is positioned where there is no data or if the tape unit failed.) A time-out occurs during the rewind operation if the tape unit fails to sense the load point hole. If the tape unit senses the larger BOT / EOT holes, the tape moves forward looking for the load point hole until the time-out occurs. 005 E zz Cartridge not inserted -With a cartridge inserted, status bit 3 is 0, but should be 1. 006 E 'Z2. File protect -The file protect arrow is pointed to SAFE for a write operation. Status bit 6 is sensed as a 1 but should be a (indicates tape can be written). 007 E zz Cyclic redundancy check error -The data track CRC is bad (refer to Error Checking in Section 4). Obtaining a correct CRC requires proper operation of a" read/write components in the tape unit. An excessively used tape can cause 007 errors. Tape life is several thousand head passes on a customer cartridge and approximately 500 head passes on a CE diagnostic cartridge. 008 E zz Records or files out of sequence -Format record sequence numbers or header file numbers are not read in the correct order (refer to Tape Writing and Formatting in Section 4). 009 E 'Z2. End of data -End of data (hex 42) was read from the record type byte of a data record when end of data was not expected. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 010 E zz End of file -A read or write operation was attempted beyond the last record on the file. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 011 E zz Specified file number cannot be found -A hex FF (end of marked tape) was read from the header record file type byte before the user specified file was found. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 012 E 'Z2. Physical end of tape -EOT status bit a was sensed as a 1, which indicates an EOT hole was sensed. An incorrect number of files or an incorrect file size can cause this error. 013 E 'Z2. Tape unit not ready An incorrect device address was specified by the user for the tape unit or there was not status response from the tape unit. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-61 Device Error Error Code Device Address Subdevice y Address zz E 'ZZ Description ,/ xx Tape (continued) 5103 Printer 014 " Specified subdevice is not attached -An invalid subdevice was specified by the user or expected subdevice status was not sensed. Printer not attached -An incorrect device address was specified by the user for the printer, or returned status on bus in was hex FF. End of forms -'+End of forms' line is down. This is caused by a defective switch and associated circuits, a maladjusted switch, or /- "---~ 013 5 00 i 050 5 00 !, ~i' ~;' I 051 5 052 5 054 5 055 5 056 5 3-62 00 00 00 00 the absence of forms. Printer not ready -Printer voltages (+24 Vdc or 10.8 Vdc) out of tolerance or a wire check occurred with the print head at the left margin. Forms step time-out -A forms emitter pulse did not occur within approximately two seconds from the previous forms emitter pulse. This timing does not apply during the forms movement stopping sequence. 00 Wire check -Indicates that a print wire driver was on too long. If the print head is in the left margin and' -wire on' is down, a 051 error occurs. If the print head is not in the left margin and '-wire on' is down, a 054 error occurs. Undefined interrupt -'-Interrupt request 2' line is down but none of the three interrupt bits from the printer adapter are on: Print emitter interrupt Status byte B bit 2 Not ready Status byte B bit 3 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms(120 cps) timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (90 cps) timer interrupt Incorrect print emitter sequence -The current print emitter and previous print emitter are out of sequence. Print emitter sequence when printing: right is 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1 etc left is 3, 2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 3 etc /--~ "- j Device Error Code Error xx Device Address y 5 Subdevice Address zz 00 Description (" 5103 Printer 057 Missing print emitter pulses -A print emitter pulse was not found (continued) ( ( , Tape { 058 5 059 5 900 to E 999 00 00 xx during the specified time (150 ms -SO cps, 100 ms -120 cps). The print head stepper motor begins turning when it receives pulses from the printer adapter. Error checking begins when the print head stepper motor is up to speed. If a print emitter pulse does not occur during the 100 ms or 150 ms timing, a 057 error occurs. If a print emitter pulse does occur but is not the expected pulse, a 056 error occurs. Refer to Print Emitter Error Timing following these error codes. Failures that prevent the carrier from moving (broken belt) cause a 057 error. Light mechanical binds or print emitter failure usually cause a 056 error. Timer interrupt time-out -Defective 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer. Timer accuracy is checked by running the printer diagnostic program (MOl 800). Overspeed error -Five or six print emitters occurred during one print head stepper motor step. Normal number of print emitters is 2 to 4 per motor step. Diagnostic errors generated by diagnostic sections. Refer to Diagnostic Program Routines or MAP 300 for error definitions. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-63 SERIAL I/O ERROR CODES The display format for serial I/O error codes is: ERROR xxx yyy where xxx is the error code and yyy is the device address of the failing device. Device Error Codes Description Error Device Address 510 002 yyy An invalid command was sent to an I/O device. For example: • A REWIND (BASIC) or )REWIND (APL) command is issued to an I/O device. • An invalid device characteristic was specified to the command device. • The input buffer size was increased after the input device was opened. • An invalid parameter was specified when opening the command device or an I/O device. 003 yyy In modem mode, a data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be caused by: • The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard interface. • A defective cable. • The I/O device power is not on. • The I/O device is attached with the wrong cable. 3-64 / Device Error Error Codes Device Address Description ( SIO 003 yyy (continued) (continued) (- ( 004 yyy 010 yyy ( 013 yyy 014 yyy (/ In modem mode, request to send (RTS) from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 receive operation. In terminal mode, clear to send (CTS) from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be caused by: • The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard interface. • A defective cable. • The I/O device is attached with the wrong cable. • The I/O device power is not on. • The wrong mode (modem, ignore, terminal, or set) is specified. • Hardware malfunction. Hardware malfunction. The 5100 recognized an end-of-file condition. This condition can be caused by: · Entering CMD O. · In modem mode, data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 receive operation. · In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 receive operation. The Serial I/O Adapter feature hardware is not installed or it is defective. The Serial I/O Adapter program is not loaded in user storage. An invalid device address was specified. Diagnostic Program Routines_ 3-65 PRINT EMITTER ERROR TIMING (NOMINAL TIMINGS) I- 1 Print Emitter Emitter Sequence = 1, 3 -.fl 120 cps SO cps 0.S3 1.25 "ffiS "I- 2 I I n n n n ,-----!fl 3 1 0.S3 1.25 ms "I- I 0.S3 1.25 ms -I- I 0.S3 0.S3 1.25 1.25--1 '-"'--'ms I ms 2 3 ·1- I I I ~. One missing I I '-X lOne missing print emitter I I I i I I I I : print emitter = error 056 I I Error 056 I I I I 1 I occurs here ! , : I 71 j I I Emitter sequence = 1, 1 I I I I I I I I I I I Two missing print Two missing 1 print emitters !/"",! I 1 I I emitters = error 056 or 057 I I I I I X I X I I I I I I I I I I I I Error 056 timing ------1-"" I starts in this area 100 ms (120 cps) 150 ms (SO cps) If error 057 timing starts here.-------.... an error 057 occurs 100 ms or 150 ms later - -~ 100 ms (120 cps) because no print emitters 150 ms (SO cps) were present during this time. Three or more missing If error 057 timing starts here, print emitters = error 057 an error 056 occurs here ----------- because an out of sequence print emitter was sensed before 3.3 ms or 2.66 ms elapsed for error code 057. TAPE READ TEST ERROR CHART ( 4 - ( -:, ,1. ,{ ( ( Error Code 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 901 903 906 907 909 912 915 918 921 924 927 930 933 936 937 938 939 940 943 Meaning A TIN key pressed Incorrect command detected Machine error Timeout Cartridge in place errors File protect error Data error Sequence error End of data test End of file test End of mark test End of tape test Device not attached Device not selected Device reset error Card logic test error Subdevice address error Interrupt error Wrap test-no data Cartridge in place error File protect error LED/PTX test LED/PTX test LED/PTX test Erase mode test Erase mode test-channel 0 Erase mode test-channel 1 Select magnet test Forward select magnet status test Reverse select magnet status test Interrupt error Wrap test-no interrupt Wrap test-extra data Area Tested Keyboard F2, G2 F2, tape control card Read/write head Cartridge in place switch File protect switch Tape cartridge, read/write head Tape cartridge, read/write head Tape cartridge Tape cartridge Tape cartridge Tape cartridge F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2, tape control card F2 Cartridge in place switch File protect switch LED/PTX assembly LED/PTX assembly LED/PTX assembly F2, tape control card F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Select magnets F2, tape control card F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Tape control card Tape control card Diagnostic Program Routines 3-67 Error Code 946 947 948 949 950 951 Meaning Wrap test-read/write head Wrap test-no data Cartridge in place error File protect error End of tape test Tape motion test (forward) Area Tested Read/write head Tape control card Cartridge in place switch File protect switch Tape cartridge Tape motor assembly, forward select magnet /' ""~ "-- 952 953 954 . 957 958 960 963 966 970 973 982 983 985 986 987 988 989 994 995 996 3-68 Tape motion test (reverse) Tape motion test BOT and EOT test EOT test Tape speed test BOT test BOT test Tape speed test BOT and EOT test Tape speed test BOT test Read data error Read data error-channel 1 Read data error-channel 0 Sync byte test-channel 0 Sync byte test-channel 1 Sync byte test Read data error Wrap test-no error Wrap test OK Reverse select magnet Brake arm LED/PTX assembly lED/PTX assembly Cartridge stop blocks LED/PTX assembly Cartridge stop blocks Cartridge stop blocks F2, tape control card Cartridge stop blocks F2, tape control card Tape control card Read/write head Read/write head Read/write head Read/write head F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Tape control card None / , "~ / -'" Service Aids ERROR INDICATORS There are two error indicators on the 5100-the control panel PROCESS CHECK light and messages on the display. The PROCESS CHECK light is activated by parity errors detected in any of several functional units. (See Controller in Section 4.) When the PROCESS CHECK light is activated, the machine stops immediately with the error latched. This allows you to identify the type of error by means of the logic probe. Error messages are displayed only when enough of the 5100 internal functions are operating to ensure that the display message is accurate. Error messages appear whenever the customer programs sense an error condition or when the CE diagnostic programs are run and an error occurs. The errors that occur when the diagnostic programs run are coded to provide entry points to the MAPs. Halt codes are displayed when a failure occurs during the bring up program. When the bring up program is run, a sequence of letters (A through K) is displayed; each letter indicates the completion of a portion of the bring up program. If a failure occurs during bring up, the last letter of the sequence indicates the failure that occurred. This information is used in the MAPs to determine the cause of the failure. Moving the switch from the RUN position stops program processing upon completion of the E cycles of the current microinstruction. To see the effect of the run switch when the 5100 is processing, set the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch to the DISPLAY REGISTERS position. Register 0 of one of the program levels changes rapidly unless the 5100 is halted by a halt microinstruction. Moving the run switch from the RUN position stops register 0 and allows you to read the hex numbers on the display. The 5100 remains stopped until the run switch is returned to the RUN position or until the step switch is pressed. (./ ( Step Switch The step switch has no effect on the operation of the 5100 unless the run switch is moved from the RUN position. When the step switch is pressed, the 5100 executes one microinstruction and then stops. The step switch must be pressed and then released in order to execute each microinstruction. Pressing the step switch moves the number in register 0 of the current program level to the next microinstruction address as each microinstruction is processed. ( JUMPERS Machine Check Jumper CE Switches Two CE switches, run and step, are located inside the 5100 next to the display assembly. Removing the top cover allows access to these switches. The run switch is the two-position toggle switch and the step switch is the small momentary switch. This jumper connects pin G2-S07 to G2-S09 on the 5100 A 1 board. Removing this jumper allows the controller to continue functioning when an error occurs on the machine check line. Misleading results can be received by running with the jumper removed. Basic Language Jumper Run Switch The run switch controls the operational state of the 5100. To execute programs, the run switch must be in the RUN position. This is the processing state and the switch must be in this position when the 5100 is returned to the customer. This jumper connects pin F2-S04 to F2-UOB on the A1 board. The jumper ties the '+APL switch' line to ground. Display Jumper This jumper connects pin J2-G07 to J2-UOB. To use the jumper, see Note on page 2 of 551 in the Circuits section of this manual. Service Aids 3-69 -_.-- .. - -_. ---.- DISPLAY REGISTERS The remaining level 0 registers contain hex EEEE. To display the hex registers and read/write storage. size, ROL 1 = hex 2345 • the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch must be in the RFL 1 = hex FEDC II DISPLAY REGISTERS position. This displays the first 512 bytes or 256 halfwords of storage. The first 64 halfwords are the registers. The remaining level 1 registers contain hex DDDD. The 64 registers (halfwords) are divided into 4 levels (0, ROL2 = hex 9ABC .. 1, 2, and 3) of 16 registers each (0 through F). The MAPs refer to the registers and levels in an abbreviated The remaining level 2 registers contain hex CCCC. manner. For example, R1 L2 means register 1 level 2. ROL3 = hex BCBC II The position of the L3Z-64-R32 switch determines the RFL3 = hex FFFF II number of registers displayed. In the L32 position the 32 registers in levels 0 and 2 are displayed. Likewise, in The remaining level 3 registers contain hex BBBB. the R32 position the 32 registers in levels 1 and 3 are displayed. To display all 64 registers, move the switch Register to 64. level Use The following examples and the illustration show how to o Normal Machine Operation locate certain registers within the various levels. Use the Communication/Serial I/O Mode numbers in lines 5 and 6 to help locate the registers in 2 Printer and Tape each level. 3 Keyboard Note: These register bytes are displayed vertically. ROLO = hex 1234 II R1 LO = hex 5786 • R FLO = hex 0000 II RBL2 RAL2 7 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD Level 2 I~~C!I:"CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD A CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC C CCCCCCCC C BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB F Line 5 Line 6 00~~~~22333F5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF 0000 00~~2233445566778899AABBCCDDEEFFOO~~2233FF5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 OOOOOOOpOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO L32 R32 3-70 Read/Write Storage Size In this example, the read/write storage size = hex 3FFF Altering Storage Size To alter the storage size to a value less than the available storage size of the machine: 1. 2. Hold the CMD key down and press the HOLD key. Hold the CMD key down and press the -(minus) key. Press the A key. Enter OOAS B· The address of the last byte of installed read/write storage is stored in read/write storage halfword hex OOAS. Read/write storage size is measured each time the bring up program is run and is not valid at hex OOAS until checkpoint H is displayed. B ( ( The hexadecimal number read/write storage size indicates the amount of read/write storage installed. Read/write storage size = hex 3FFF-16K (K2, K4) Read/write storage size = hex 7FFF-32K (L2, L4) Read/write storage size = hex BFFF-48K (M2, M4) Read/write storage size = hex FFFF-64K (N2, N4) All other values for read/write storage size are invalid unless the PATCH program or serial I/O microprogram is loaded. 3. 4. 5. B. Enter the storage size you desire. The size ~nt~~r~rtF. must be smaller than the available storage size of the machine. Press the SPACE bar. Hold the CMD key down and press the * (multiply) key (for BASIC) or the x (multiply) key (for APL). Enter BE. Enter 1200 (for BASIC) or Sooo (for APL) and press EXECUTE. Display the registers. The storage size you entered will be in storage location OOA8 6. 7. S. 9. 10. D. 11. Read/Write Storage Addressing Press RESTART to return to the original storage size of the machine. 008F OOOO _____ {358EEEEEEEEE 0030 -DDDDDDDDDDDDDFD BBBBBBBBBBBBBFF 00401~~2~4~7~6~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~E~C~ 0080~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~F=F, 0100 c: 0140 0180--1-=======-=-=i1===.:..=,.;;r::.==~1=======-=-=i1=====-=-=-= 0198 OlBD Service Aids 3-71 PRINT PLOT FORMS MOVEMENT EXERCISER PROGRAM The print plot forms movement exerciser program is used to check the 5103 Printer for' forms movement problems. This program is contained on the print plot/BASIC or the print plot/ APL tape cartridge. The printout of the program follows: I I The program plots two sets of parallel horizontal lines. These lines are tolerance lines. The program then , ;1 alternately plots one dot at a time within each set of tolerance lines. If the forms movement is working correctly, the dots should be plotted within the tolerance lines. After plotting all of the dots, the program then plots the parallel vertical lines. If the forms movement is working correctly, these lines should be the same length as the distance between the top and bottom horizontal lines; the density of the vertical line should be consistent. Use the following procedure to run the print plot exerciser program: 1. If in BASIC mode, load the print plot/BASIC forms movement exerciser program. See Appendix A. Print Plot/BASIC Forms Movement Exerciser Program of the IBM 5100 Print Plot/BASIC User's Manual, SA21-9265. If in APL mode, load the print plot/ APL program. See Appendix A. Print Plot/ APL Forms Movement Exerciser Program of the IBM 5100 Print Plot/APL User's Manual, SA21-9264. The file name is PLOTDIAG. Watch the results on the 5103 Printer. If the dots are not within the tolerance lines or the vertical lines are not the correct length or density, use the Print Plot Error Chart in this section. 3-72 / Print Plot Error Chart START Use .MAP 810 No Yes No Run customer job using this chart No Yes Run print plot test using chart then run MOl 800 ( Yes Reru n test usi ng only amount of paper required Do forms emitter disk adjustment and emitter timing Print emitter pick- up, left margin, and hold down bracket adjustment check for binds Yes Remove tractor assernbly and rerun test Notes: Also verify: 1. Platen gear backlash 2. Forms feed stepper motor gear backlash Do the following adjustment: 1. Platen and paper deflector 2. Platen release eccentrics 3. Platen pressure rolls 4. Check a frame alignment 5. Print head adjustment 6. Print head ribbon shield No Verify all adjust- ments and use scope procedure on forms emitter Loop MOl 800 Service Aids 3-73 Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide This guide is a summary of the 5100 diagnostics and a guide for troubleshooting intermittent failures. 5100 DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY The 5100 diagnostics start testing a small area of the machine and gradually expand to test the complete system. Each diagnostic tests a specific area and overlap each other. For example, the ROS diagnostic tests ROS but, because ROS contains the printer microinstructions, some printer operations are indirectly tested. Normally the tests should be run in the sequence shown on the Diagnostic Summary Chart. However, in the case of intermittent failures, this sequence can be altered depending on: -The information you have concerning the failure. Whether or not this is the first call. -How frequently the failure occurs. There are three categories of diagnostics: • Exercisers • Failure isolation • Utilities' Exercisers The diagnostics that fall into the exerciser category are the bring up and ROS resident programs. These programs exercise the machine and halt when failures occur. Now you can use the MAPs to locate the failure or, if the failure is intermittent, use the Diagnostic Summary Chart on the facing page to assist you in isolating to the failing FRU. Failure Isolation The tape resident diagnostics provide failure isolation. These diagnostics are integrated into the MAPs and are called MDls. The MDls locate failing FRUs associated with the printer, the internal tape unit, the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit, and Communications/Serial I/O features. 3-74 Utilities Utilities are contained in the ROS resident diagnostics. They are used to display and alter read/write storage, to branch, to copy tape to read/write storage, and to copy read/write storage to tape. These diagnostics are not covered in this guide; refer to ROS Resident Programs and Tests in this section. DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART The Diagnostic Summary Chart shows the diagnostics, the areas tested, the operating instructions, and the normal sequence of use. The chart does not show all of the diagnostic capabilities, just those primarily used for failure isolation. When reviewing the chart, note how the diagnostics use the building block concept. That is, they begin by testing the basic machine functions and then proceed until they have tested the most sophisticated functions. The bring up diagnostic does not loop automatically; therefore, four of its tests are repeated as ROS resident diagnostics CMD 2, 3, 4, and 5. Looping on a MOl allows repetitive testing of a complete device. Failures during looping cause a branch to a subsection of the M DI that checks a smaller area of the device. You can loop on subsections of the MOl to further isolate the failure. However, it is important to start with one of the displayed OCP2 options because these tests are sequence sensitive. DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART (/ Tests Bus Bit In Op Code Test R/W Storage Interrupt 1, 2, 3 Device Address Bus Out Stuck Key Storage (0600 to end) ROS Content and CRC ROS Address Read Back Bring Up Complete ( Power On )I-------t.~ + -4-------1., ____ _ BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS Halt Indicator Blank A A B A B C A B C D A B C D E A B C D E F A B C D E F G A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H I A B C D E F G H I J A B C D E F G H I J K Area Tested G2, Power, Display F2 F2, G2 E2 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2,F2 E2, F2, J2 F2 F2, Keyboard K2 through N4 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 H2,H4 ( OR--------------------------------------------~ DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode I + Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode: - - - Hold CMD and press HOLD Hold CMD and press -(minus) Hold CMD * or X (multiply) APl/BASIC Normal machine operation To run CMD 0, 1,2, 3, 4, or 5: - - - Press C Hold CMD and press the appropriate test number (0, 1,2,3,4, or 5) Press EXECUTE Area Tested Tape Read Tape Read Op Code Loop ROS Read CRC Loop ROS Address Loop R/W Storage Internal tape unit without tape motion Internal tape unit with tape motion F2, G2 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 K2 through N4 Test CMD 0 - CMD 1 - CMD 2 - CMD 3 - CMD 4 - CMD 5 - I OR----------------------------------------------------------J DCP2 + Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Model as described above. Run CMD 0 or 1 as described above. Miscellaneous In structions: ( Press ATTN ( 1 time) = MDI Options DCP 2 is now loaded. Select MD1 from the menu via the 2 times) = DCP 2 Menu Press ATTN ( Press ATTN ( instructions on the display. 3 times) = DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode y I Instructions Loop On MD = Refer to Loop on I MDI 800 -Printer -Refer to MDI 800 in this section.J MDI in this section , L I MOl - ,Ir ~ l MDI -820, Communications and Serial I/O -Refer to MDI 820 in this section. I MDI -840, Auxiliary Tape Unit -Refer to MDI 840 in this section.J 860, Tape Write, Internal and Auxiliary -Refer to MOl 860 in this section. I Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-75 TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES • Have the customer record as much information as possible when the failure occurs. How to Use This Guide How often does the machine fail? Because this is a guide instead· of a MAP, you must Does the failure occur during one or many jobs or make. many decisions based on the information available programs? and the frequency of the failure. The OR circles on the Failure Isolation Chart in this section indicate that type Does the failure occur in BASIC, APL, or both? of situation. Does the failure occur at a particular time, such as when the machine is first powered up or after it is Recommendations on Failure Information warmed up? The following recommendations are given to assist you Is the system configuration always the same or are in obtaining failure information. Their order of other devices attached when the failure occurs? presentation has no significance. • Record any information on the previous items and • Determine the customer error code if possible. An record any fixes in the space provided. error code is normally more factual that the operator's failure description. The descriptions of the Notes customer error codes are in the BASIC Reference Manual, SA21-9217, Appendix B and in the APL Reference Manual, SA21-9212, Chapter 11. Refer to Error Codes in this section for error codes below 100. Use these error code descriptions to aid you in deciding which diagnostics or MDls torun. If the failure appears to be a printer or a tape problem, record the status byte information. See Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions or Tape Status ." ' ... / Byte Bit Descriptions under Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures in this section. This information will help you to isolate the failure and to determine which MOl to run. " , ,/ ' 3-76 ( Service Hints • Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by: Vibrating the machine/ cards/ connections. Raising the machine temperature (unplug the blower). CAUTION 00 not exceed 20 minutes. Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit coolant). • Machine power must be off when removing the read/write storage cards (K2 through N2). All other cards can be removed with power on. • You can remove the following cards/devices if they are not part of the failing operation or when trying to isolate to a failing operation: A2 - I/O Driver B2 -Communications and serial I/O APL cards C2, 02, 04, H4 if the failure is in BASIC BASIC card C4 if the failure is in APL Read/write storage cards above 16K 5103 Printer 1506 Auxiliary Tape Unit • You can swap either the parts of the tape units (internal and auxiliary) or the complete tape units (physically or electrically). To swap electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket of the 5100 A1 board (228) with the cable in socket B4 of the Auxiliary Tape Unit (580). The internal tape unit address is now E40 and the Auxiliary Tape Unit address is E80. • To loop CMO 0: Load and run CMO 0 until the first stop Insert diagnostic cartridge Hold CMO and press ATTN Press A Enter: 368C2B04 Press SPACE bar Press A Enter: 2B5831 BO Press SPACE bar Enter: BR2B04 Press EXECUTE Tape Status Byte Bit Description -Storage Address OOSF Bit O-End of Tape (EaT): Indicates that anyone of six holes in the tape (three at the beginning and three at the end) generated EOT status. Bit 1-No Device Address E Response: Indicates that status bit 1 was not active. Bit 2- Tape Running: Indicates that the forward or reverse select magnets were selected. Bit 3-Cartridge in Place: Indicates that the cartridge in place switch is active. Bit 4-Erase On: Indicates that either channel 1 or channel 0 erase current was on. Bit 5-LED and Erase OK: Indicates that the EOT and BOT LEOs were conducting and that the erase coils did not have an open circuit. Bit 6-File Protected: Indicates that the file protect switch was made. Bit 7-No Beginning of Tape (1 = No BOT): Indicates that none of the top five holes in the tape generated BOT status. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-77 J : Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions Status Byte A (RAL2) Bit O-Print Emitter Latch 3: Monitors the printer error conditions and times the print wire firing. Bit 1-Print Emitter Latch 2: Monitors the printe~ error condition and times the print wire firing. Bit 2-Print Emitter Latch 1: Monitors the printer error condition and times the print wire firing. Bit 3 - Wire Check or Not Ready: Signals the adapter that a print wire magnet was energized for more than 1.6 ms when printing or 3.0 ms when not printing. Bit 4-Forms Emitter B: Determines when to stop. Bit 5-Forms Emitter A: Forms movement. Bit 6-Not End of Forms: Indicates the presence of forms. This signal is active when forms are within two inches (50.8 mm) of the print line. Bit 7 - Left Margin: Used as a reference to position the print head. Status Byte B (RBL2) Bit O-Print Motor Latch B (0 = not B): Provides controls for the print head stepper motor. Bit 1-Print Motor Latch A (0 = not A): Provides controls for the print head stepper motor. Bit 2-Print Emitter Interrupt: Gen~rates an 'interrupt request 2' when print emitters are activated by the microprogram. 3-78 Bit 3 - Not Ready Interrupt: Is caUl~ed by the printer adapter sensing a not ready condition from the printer. Bit 4-Forms Motor Latch B (0 = not B): Provides controls for the forms feed stepper motor. Bit 5-Forms Motor Latch A (0 = not A): Provides controls for the forms feed stepper motor. Bit 6-Forms Control Interrupt: Generates an 'interrupt request 2' by changing conditions from the forms control emitter. Bit 7- Timer Interrupt: Indicates that the timer interrupt controls the speed of the print head stepper motor. ! Failure Isolation Chart Start For intermittent process checks, refer to page 4-14 Review the Customer E"or Code Descriptions in BASIC reference N manual, Appendix B, and >...;.;.-----!APL reference manual, Chapter 11 to help you determine the possibility of an operator error. Review the Customer Error Code Descriptions in this section to help you determine which I/O device to test. If in doubt. test all devices. Review problem with the operator Run DCP " CMD2.3.4.5 Use the Bring Up Diagnostic chart in this ------------------------------------, Start MAP 200 300 400 420 500 510 600 700 810 830 850 900 section to aid you in card swapping - - - - - - - - - - - Tape read Bring up Process check Note: MAP organization always starts with MAP 200. Display TV monitor Keyboard Po",",r Printer Communication, SIO Auxiliary tape Machine check out ----------1 r------ ' -----, I MOl 890 in this section. I I I .... ---------- ..... I I MOl 890. Refer to : I ~------------_4--------------~------~------~------------_4----------------~---------J (: Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-79 Language Support Troubleshooting Guide 5100 Termination Problem Process check and/or halts might be caused by a BASIC Diagnostic Tools defective printer adapter card in the 5103 printer. • List Print -Prints the user program (if a printer is attached). Run Trace, Print -Produces a printed trace of the steps as they are executed. 5100 5106. • Pause -A pause statement inserted in a program which allows you to stop execution of the program in order to look at variables. 5103 or Terminator • Run Step -Allows you to step through a customer ; ;' program. When a total system is connected, the termination is APL Diagnostic Tools done by the printer adapter card in the 5103 printer. • )FNS -Lists names of user defined functions. When only the auxiliary drive (5106) is connected, the termination is done by the terminator assembly attached • )VARS -Lists the variables. to the rear of the 5106. Be sure the terminator is mounted in the I/O connector and not in the storage • V (user defined function name) [0] - Lists the location. function. • T 6 (user defined function name) + (step numbers CRT Centering Problem separated by a space) -Results in a trace of the specified steps. If you are not able to center the CRT after installing a new J2 card on an old level machine, check the tub file • T6 (user defined function name) +10 -Results in a for subcards and FBM5572571 for the 64K machines. trace of the first 10 steps. If the B/M 5572571 is not installed, order it from Mechanicsburg. • T6 (user defined function name) +60 -Turns trace off. • 56 (user defined function name) + 3 5 -Results in a stop before statement 3 and before statement 5. You may also do the following to help debug a program: • Insert statements • Change statements • Delete statements • Insert print statements to print variables • Break complex statement into several shorter statements ./ 3-80 c: ( Bring Up Diagnostic If the diagnostic fails often enough to use the MAPs, go to MAP 200. Try to make the machine fail in order to answer the MAP questions. Also review the MAP paths to aid you in determining which part to swap. If the diagnostic seldom fails, use the following chart to help determine which part to swap. BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS Tests Halt Indicator Blank A A B ABC ABC D ABC D E ABC D E F ABC D E F G ABC D E F G H ABC D E F G H I A B C D E F G H I J ABC D E F G H I J K Area Tested G2, Power, Display F2 F2, G2 E2 C2,C4,D2,D4, E2,F2 E2, F2,J2 F2 F2, Keyboard K2 through N4 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 H2,H4 f Bus Bit In Op Code Test R/W Storage Interrupt 1, 2, 3 Device Address Bus Out Stuck Key Storage (0600 to end) ROS Content 1 and CRC ROS Address Read Back Bring Up Complete 1 The sequence number displayed during this test identifies the card tested. Sequence Number 10,11,12,13,14,15 16,17,18 20,21,22,23,24 25,26,27,28,29 2A,2B,2C,2D,2E,2F ROS Card C4 (BASIC ROS) E2 (ROS Adapter) D2 (APL ROS 1) D4 (APL ROS 2) C2 (APL ROS 3) ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-81 Intermittent Process Check Use the following procedure to help you find the cause of intermittent process checks: 1. Before resetting the PROCESS CHECK light, refer to Error Checking in Section 4 of this manual. This provides a list of lines you may probe to help isolate the process check error to a card or a device. Use the following probe points and card references, along with the 5100 logic diagrams and MAPs to isolate the process check error: • Rd data error (-G2-S08) -This is a parity error on data in the read data register of the controller. Cards that can cause this error are: the controller (G2) card; the display (J2) card; the BASIC, I/O, and diagnostic (H2) cards: the read/write storage (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, and N4) cards; and the APL supervisor (H4) card. A parity error, resulting in an Rd data error, occurs if there is an attempt to read from a read/write storage address for which the read/write storage cards are not installed. This means that if less than 64K of read/write storage is installed, an error in the microprogram can cause a process check. • Bus in error (+G2-U09) -This error is a parity check on bus in. Cards that can cause this error are the controller (G2) card; the base I/O (F2) card; the ROS adapter (E2) card; the expansion feature (B2) card; and the I/O cable driver (A2) card. In addition, this error can be caused by the following I/O devices: keyboard, tape unit, printer, or Auxiliary Tape Unit. To determine the device address, probe the following address line points and refer to the following chart: XO F2-007 X1 F2-B07 X2 F2-009 X3 F2-002 YO F2-B09 Y1 F2-01O Y2 F2-B10 Y3 F2-011 Note: An active line will have a + voltage level. 3-82 Device Address Address Lines Device Name o XOYO Controller G2 XOY1 Nonexecutable ROS (BASIC C4 and APL ROS C2, 02, 04) 2 XOY2 Not assigned 3 XOY3 Not assigned 4 X1YO Keyboard and the APL-BASIC switch 5 X1Y1 Printer 6 X1Y2 Not assigned 7 X1Y3 Not assigned r 8 X2YO Expansion feature 9 X2Y1 Not assigned 10 X2Y2 Not assigned 11 X2Y3 Not assigned 12 X3YO Not assigned 13 X3Y1 Not assigned 14 X3Y2 Tape units 15 X3Y3 All I/O • +Address check (F2-B13) -This is a device address check on the base I/O (F2) card. The base I/O (F2) card and the controller (G2) card can cause this error. • +Address check, ROS adapter (E2-010) -The device addresses are checked at the ROS adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Address check, expansion feature (B2·J13) - The device addresses are checked at the expansion feature (B2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Address check, printer (A2-P12) -The device addresses are checked at the printer adapter card and the error can be probed there. / • +Address check, auxiliary tape (C1-P05) -The device addresses are checked at the auxiliary tape adapter card and the error can be probed there. Only one of the device address lines XO, X1, X2, i or X3, and only one of the device address lines, YO, Y1, Y2, or Y3 will be up when a device is addressed. The device address check, occurs when any odd number of the eight lines is up when a device is addressed. ( ( ( ( (' (~ • +Bus out parity check (F2-D13) -This is a parity check or bus out on the base I/O (F2) card. Either the controller (G2) card or the base I/O (F2) card can cause this error. • +Bus out parity check, ROS adapter (E2-B 11) - The parity of bus out is tested on the ROS adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, expansion feature (B2-M02) -The parity of bus out is tested on the expansion feature (B2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, printer (A2-P12) -The parity of bus out is tested on the printer adapter card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, auxiliary tape (C1-P04) - The parity of bus out is tested on the auxiliary tape adapter card and the error can be probed there. 2. Reseat all cards and cables. 3. Check voltages. 4. Check the customers AC ground. 5. Check the fan(5). Tape Use the following procedure to help you find the cause of intermittent tape errors: 1. Any cartridges that were written before a problem was resolved on the tape drive, can still cause problems. 2. Check the cartridge stops (see 224). 3. Perform the Tape Select Magnet Service Check (see 222). 4. Clean the tape head with isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue. Check the head adjustment (see 231). Replace the head if it is worn. 5. Clean the spindle assembly and the drive rolls with isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue. 6. Reset all the cables and the cards in the tape unit. 7. Check to be sure the tape unit does not face into a strong light or the sun. 8. Make sure the brake arms are white and not black. AC Power Grounding Checks To check for proper AC power receptacle grounding, measure the AC voltages at the location shown in the following figure. This check does not detect a poor quality ground (high resistance to earth). GrOUndrn° ~ ~. ~ ~Neutral _ Hot Front View If you suspect a line problem you can: 1. Place an isolation transformer between the line and the 5100 computer. 2. Inspect the AC box to be sure the wires do not cross. The line side and load side wires should not cross as this can induce line spikes in the load side wires. 3. Check the AC box capacitors to ensure they are not twisted and their wires are not crossed. 4. Check for a machine or a device in the same room, on the same line, or anywhere nearby that can induce conductive or inductive noise. The voltage between neutral and ground should be less than 2 volts AC. The voltage between neutral and hot should be approximately 110 Vac to 120 Vac. Also, the voltage between ground and hot should be approximately 110 Vac to 120 Vac. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-33 Check that all frame ground connections are clean and tight in all devices on the system. Frame grounding is indicated either by a braided cable or a green and yellow wire. 5100 ground locations: Bottom cover. center right side CRT mounting screen and frame Power supply fan motor Raceway Power switch AC power box Tape unit motor AC capacitor in tape unit TV monitor plug 5103 ground locations: Left front corner Right front corner AC line cord Flat cable shield clamp Left rear of forms tractor 5106 ground locations: Tape unit motor AC capacitor Cooling fan Power switch AC line cord A1 board Flat cable shield clamp AC Power Considerations Checking for proper AC line voltage is a task that you are familiar with. However. other aspects of the AC power source are also very important. The AC line voltage should not vary by more than ±1 0 % except for 500 ms transients of +15% to -18%. One type of AC power disturbance becoming more frequent is fractional phase loss. This is a result of phase controlled SCRs controlling motors. ovens. or other loads. These devices turn on their loads during each phase and deplete the sine wave of energy. AC Power Terms Current Carrying Ground: This is t~e neutral line that is connected to the neutral bus. 3-84 Neutral Bus: This bus bar is inside the power panel. The other neutral buses should be tied to this bus. The neutral bus should be tied to the ground bus only at the main distribution panel. Main Distribution Panel: This is the first power panel inside of the customer's building. This panel is fed directly from the power company lines. The ground bus in this panel is serviced by the service entrance ground. Ground Bus: This bus bar is in the power panel. The ground wire for the power source of the 5100. along with a wire into the panel from an approved earth ground source. should connect to this bar. Earth Ground: The definition depends upon local electrical building codes. Usually. an earth ground is supplied in two forms: 1. A metal pipe running into the earth and containing running water. Stagnant water or sump lines are not good earth ground sources. nor are lines broken by nonmetal connections. 2. A metal stake driven into the ground. The length of the stake and the depth to which it must be driven into the ground depend on local codes. Noncurrent Carrying Ground: This is the line from the ground in the receptacle to the ground bus. ( ( :{ AC Power Distribution in a Typical Commercial Building Main Distribution Panel I _I I Transformer Neutral I I I oav Center _ Bus ............ ~ . ....... 1" Tap l- I -~ Ground~ Bus N· I Power Panel A I I ~ These buses must be tied to an approved ground source. They These buses Neutral can be tied through wire I t .. 3 I must not be Bus "'-. but, if possible, a ground source 0 tied together should o be supplied through wire Ground., also. ~ in the power panel. Bus It - I I r--........ I I I I B Gro~nd '.~ /' Neutral Hot .. ~ I U ~ U ~ UI~/--~----------------;-~ 120 Vac Receptacle Front View To Other 120 Vac Circuits Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-85 MOl 800 Printer Diagnostics The following chart shows the relationsip of MOl 800 and MOls 801 through 805. MOl 800 tests the entire printer. When MOl 800 detects a failing condition, it halts and displays the test routine that failed. MOl 800 isolates certain failures as shown on the chart or transfers to one of the other MOls shown for further failure isolation. MOls 801 through 805 can be looped by returning to the MOl options and following the instructions on the display. 801 - ( - End of forms Enter ) - No end of forms Forms motion problems MOl Printer (8001 ~ Tests: 5103 circuits and mechanics. ~ 802 -Incorrect status -Voltage checks Analyzes to: A 1 A 1 voltage regulator and sense amp card 803 -Adapter card, I/O cable and signals B 1A 2 adapter card -Carrier motion - Print head motion Left margin -Print head retract Print emitter pickup Print emitter board 804 -Print head interface Power t-- '----+ -Print emitter 805 - Left margin - Left margin timing - Print problems -Print quality 3-86 MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O This MOl tests the communications/serial I/O features which reside on the B2 card. When this MOl detects a failing con· dition, it halts and displays the routine that failed. For descriptions of these routines, refer to the Communications Adapter/Seriall/O Adapter and Diagnostic Routines. MOl 840 Tape Read This diagnostic has two parts: 1. 2. MOl 840 tests the tape unit without tape motion .. MOl 844 tests the tape unit with tape motion. ( MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O Tests: Communications/Serial I/O circuits The chart on this page shows the relationship of MOl 840 through MOl 847. Be sure to record the information in the status bytes for at least the first failure in order to compare status information with the MOl routine causing the halt. Refer to the tape status byte information in this section. MOls 840 and 844 cannot be looped together. To loop on MOl 840, load MOl 840 and remove the tape cartridge be· fore running the MOL Go to the option menu to set up the loop. To loop on MOl 844, load and run MOl 844. Go to the option menu to set up the loop. MOl 840 and 844 can be run for both the internal or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. However, a confusion factor exists since all references are to the 5106 Auxiliary Tape unit. Also, the MOl subsection has to be loaded from the internal tape unit and might be difficult to load depending on the frequency of the failure. ( Analyzes to: Communications: Timer interrupts Data set ready Clear to send Data through the communications circuits Long space interrupts Serial I/O: Timer interrupts Data set ready Clear to send Data through the serial I/O circuits ( Enter 841 -Cartridge in place - File protect -LED, BOT, EOT • MOl 840 Tape Read Tests: Tape read without tape motion Analyzes to: Status reset - 842 -Erase -Select magnets --. 843 - - Interrupt Data th rough tape control card ( Interrupt Read check 845 -Catridge in place -Read data -Customer error codes 002·014 MOl 844 Tape Read ( Tests: Tape read with tape motion 846 - BOT -EOT -Tape speed 847 -Tape motion Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-87 MOl 860 Tape Write Diagnostic This MOl tests all the tape write functions of the internal and the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. It also analyzes all failures except erase as shown in the following chart. Be sure to record the tape status on at least the first failure. Refer to the tape status byte information in this section. Enter ,I'" MDI 860 Tape Write Tests: Tape write head and circuits Analyzes to: Velocity Acceleration 861 -Analyzes t~. erase Deceleration Write/read back Symmetry (See Note 1 ) Peak shift (See Note 2) Read/write head azimuth (See Note 3) Binds in customer cartridge (See Note 4) Notes: The following notes are for instructional purposes c o c c o c only. The drawings are not meant to be scope pictures as the diagnostics are designed to check the tolerances. 1. Symmetry -The bit cells are of equal duration. This is a function of the tape read/write channel. The tape velocity tested OK in a previous routine. Undistorted , I Raw Data I : ': I 1 I I : I I I ----1-, I r---, I I----J I I : Clock Clock Clock I tJ ,..--1., ; t J r-----' LJ r--- I LJ Peak Shifted LJ I I I 1 Raw Data I Raw Data --.-- 3. Azimuth -The physical angular alignment of the Bit Cell read/write head gap with the recorded transitions on the tape. It is similar to skew, but due to recording data serial by bit and by character (as apposed to parallel recording on 7 and 9 track tape) it is referred '.. / to as azimuth. 2. Peak Shift -The timing shift of the analog signal peaks 4. Binds in customer cartridge -All tape write tests is due to the bit pattern and to the tape to read/write head must run satisfactorily with the diagnostic cartridge relationship. This is a function of reading tape. prior to inserting the customers cartridge. 3-88 MOl 890 DIAGNOSTIC SECTIONS MOl 890 allows you to select the same routines as used in the other MOls. In other words, routine PT03 in MOl 890 is the same as PT03 in MOl 800. However, the routines in MOl 890 do not halt or branch when sensing a failing condition. The main advantage of MOl 890 is that it allows you to select individual MOl sections which is especially useful when scoping intermittent failures. ( ( Enter l 891 - Tap'e write routines. These are the same routines as MOls 840, 841,843,844, MOl 890 Diagnostic Section ~ 845,846, and 847. Provides selection of routines for I/O devices. 892 - 5103 J>rinter routines. These are the same routines as MOl 800,801,802,803,804, and 805. 893 - Tape read routines. These are the same routines as MOl 860 and 861. ~ 894 - Communications/Serial I/O routines. These are the same routines as those in MOl 820. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-89 5100 SYMPTOM INDEX ( , Symptom Intermittent process checks with all I/O devices attached. Isolation Aid Remove all the I/O devices to see if the problem still occurs. Fix Replace the printer adapter card. "" ( '",--/ Intermittent process checks and bring Check the power cable plug (YU1) on Reform the clamp holding Y1. up failures. the A 1 board. The clamp might be formed wrong; this allows the plug to fall out. Process check on power up. Suspect the K2 storage card. Swap Replace the K2 card. the K2 card with another storage card to verify this. Go to DISPLAY REGISTERS. If ROLO Replace the G2 card. , j Bring up failure on power up. is 0006, the failure is in the bring up 1 diagnostic. Fails to power up intermittently. Fans None. Replace the POWER ON/POWER run but there is no voltage to A 1 OFF switch. board. Fails to power up within five seconds Remove the AC fan motor plug and If the machine powers up, suspect after power down (30 to 90 seconds). the AC tape motor plug at the AC the wiring of the AC box. box. Then power up. Blows card and land patterns on A 1 Check the TV monitor line cord wiring The customer must have the TV board after installing a TV monitor. for an error causing chassis to be hot monitor wiring corrected. (110 AC). Keyboard locks with flashing cursor. Check the last key pressed and verify Clean or replace the failing flyplate that it operates. Press the RESTART and / or key module. key to isolate the failing key. Key is pressed and wrong character is None. Replace the ROS card, storage card, displayed. or display card. Unsteady display. Switch to DISPLAY REGISTERS. Repair the connections on the Check the connections on the brightness control. brightness control. No display and registers are not Remove the printer from the system. Replace the printer adapter card. running. Unable to clear messages from None (operator error). Do not use undefined function keys or display line 15 when errors occur copy display without a printer during an input statement. attached to the system. Display character distortion. Adjusting the CRT has little or no Replace the J2 card. effect. TV monitor has wavy or distorted 5100 display is OK. Uncrimp the cable connection to the characters. TV monitor. 166 APL halts in BASIC. The problem shows up in new Do not use new unmarked tapes as unmarked tapes copied by the tape output for the tape copy program. copy program. Mark the new tapes with at least one file before using. 3-90 ,--/, / / " Symptom 003 through 010 intermittent errors. 003 and 004 errors when marking new tapes. 003, 004, and 007 errors. ( 003, 004, 007 and 008 errors. 004 and 007 errors on diagnostics and customer jobs. 004 and 007 errors. 004,005, 006, 007, and 008 errors. 004, 007, and 008 errors. 007 errors. Isolation Aid Fix Check the customer grounding and Check to see if customer is using an the 5100 grounding. ungrounded extension cord. None. Replace the LED/PTX assembly. Check for bad solder connections at Replace or repair the cables and verify paddle cards and cable connectors. that all connections are good. Also check for strands of wire shorting to pins. None. Replace the H2 card. Moving the cable that goes to the Replace the CRT. CRT away from the tape control card causes the problem to disappear. Loose read/write head. Replace the read/write head. The customer usually sees only 005 Adjust tape microswitches for a errors, but can create 007 errors clearance of 0.001 inches (0.025 mm) unknowingly. to 0.003 inches (0.076). Adjust for maximum overtravel. Locking wheels are not centered or Adjust the locking wheels (see 225) seated properly in the base. and check the adjustment by pulling the cartridge out about 1/8 inch (3 mm) and releasing it. The cartridge should seat in the tape unit. Excessive retries. Check the select magnet and the jackshaft adjustments. (See 222 and 223.) The motor locks up or does not move Replace the motor. the tape properly. The tape rubs against the cartridge Reposition the tape on the spools by base plate or plastic top. doing a )LlB or UTIL; then mark a file to the end of tape and do a rewind. Extra bytes are written in the data Check out the tape by doing a )LlB or record filed on the diagnostic tape UTIL on the diagnostic tape cartridge. cartridge during a CMD 0 or CMD 1. If this works, load the failing file using the CMD 8 function. If there is an error in the data, an 007 error will be displayed. You can rebuild the damaged file using a known good tape and CMD 8 and CMD 9 procedures. The display is not blanked during tape IN PROCESS and PROCESS CHECK operations. leads are swapped. (See 210 for correct wiring). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-91 Symptom 007 and 008 errors. Isolation Aid Fix The spindle is glazed from improper Clean the spindle and drive rolls using contact pressure between the spindle isopropyl alcohol. and· the tape cartridge. This causes retries and tape errors. The customer cannot copy a complete tape to another tape or complains that tapes have different storage capacity. Spindle or jacks haft bearings. Check for proper wiring of the I/O device. All tapes have 204K bytes storage capacity. New files requireO.5K bytes for each file header. This must be considered when you set up the files. Replace as required. Wire the I/O device to provide' data terminal ready' if the 5100 is acting as a modem. If the device is acting as a terminal, wire the I/O device to provide 'data set ready'. Check the brake arms to ensure they are white. 010 and 012 errors. Noisy tape drives. SIO fails to run the I/O device. 004 error. Tape does not move. Fails when started after being inactive for some time. 012 error. 007. error with printer attached. 007 error. Check to see if the tape unit is facing Prevent direct sunlight from entering a window. the tape drive opening. Disconnect the 5103 printer to eliminate the error. Find out if the tape cartridge was in! the tape drive when the power was turned on or off. Replace the G2 card. Do not power the 5100 on or off with the tape cartridge in the drive. Check jumper J2G07 to ground. In BASIC, rows of 1's, 3's, 5's, or 9's None. appear. In APL, CRT is blank. Tape binds when being inserted or does not seat properly. 004, 007 tape· errors. Pr()cessor checks or printer errors with the 5106 attached. Processor check on 860. Diagnostic tape is damaged or 007 error occurs when diagnostic tape is run. Do the stop adjustments and ensure The window on the tape cartridge should have some clearance between the outer edge of the stop is parallel the deflector and the right stop. to the edge of the tape unit upright. Find out if the operator is continuing to key when the tape is running. Do not key while the tape is running. See if BVD fails E-5. Disconnect the Repair the defective I/O connector in 5103 and 5106. the 5106. Swap storage cards to stop error on Replace G2 card. Do not put the diagnostic tape cartridge in the tape drive when performing CMDO or CMD1 or the tape will be destroyed. Check jumpers from A 1 J2G07 to A1J2P08 and from A1G2S07 to A1G2S09. / 806. None. Processor checks occur on power up, Check jumpers on the A 1 board. but· restart works OK. , 3-92 c ( ( ( Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Intermittent tape errors 004, 007, and None. Adjust the select magnets for correct OOS. air gap. A 152 error did not occur when Check to see if failure occurs only on Alter storage size to 6 bytes less than loading a file larger than 64K bytes. 64K machines. 64K when trying to load a file larger than 64K. Intermittent processor checks from Usually fails when keying fast. Replace F2 card. the keyboard. Blank CRT. None. Check that the CRT connector is plugged in properly. The end of the cable that has 5 wires must be toward the front of the 5100. Intermittent processor checks. Meter the process check for a '+RDR' Replace the CRT. error. Intermittent processor checks on halt Unplug the fan (for no more than 15 Replace E2 card. 11S with bring up diagnostics. minutes) to cause a solid failure. 003 and 004 tape errors. Check the status byte in location Correct defective read/write head. OOSF. The byte will be 35 for normal and 39 with this error. On the 5100 model C, the character Failure still occurs when you enter Replace C2 card. entered does not match the character characters with about 15 to 20 keyed. seconds' delay between strokes. Dropping power. Plug the power supply into another Replace POWER ON/OFF switch. 5100 to be sure it works. Noisy tape drives. Fails usually in one direction. Replace jackshaft. Keyboard locks up intermittently. None. Replace CRT. Power up fails intermittently. Switch J 1 and J2 plugs. Replace the POWER ON/OFF switch. Processor checks on power up. None. Check Y1 cable plugging. Fading CRT. None. Replace G2 card. No power to A 1 board. Check the AC voltage on the output Replace the AC line filter. of the line filter. Print plot stops intermittently. None. Replace G2 card. 004 and 007 errors. None. Replace internal or external cable. Tape errors. None. Replace CRT. Characters on the CRT are different Characters at the top left corner of Replace F2 and J2 cards. sizes. the CRT are larger than those at the bottom right corner. Intermittent '+RDR' processor checks. The error becomes solid when you Replace F2 card. unplug the fan for 15 minutes or less. CRT display jitters. Check the connectors on the Replace J2 card or the CRT. brightness control potentiometer. Character entered does not match the None. Replace defective display, storage, or character on the CRT. ROS card. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-93 5100 SERVICE TIPS • You can either swap the parts of the internal and auxiliary tape units, or you can physically or DANGER electrically swap the complete tape units. To swap Do not touch or attempt to remove the coax cable electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket of the while the TV monitor is plugged into an AC outlet. 5100 A1 board with the cable socket in socket B4 of There is the possibility of 110 volts being carried on the Auxiliary Tape Unit. The internal tape unit the coax BNC connector and the cable shield, if the address is now E40 (BASIC) or 002 (APL). TV monitor has not been properly modified by the user. This voltage could also appear on the frame of the 5100. Tape File Recovery This procedure can be used to recover tape files before and after a defective file (CRCin header). To identify a defective file, do a UTIL or )UB of the cartridge starting with file 1. General Tips Use the following example: Files 1 through 4 are good, • Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by: file 5 is defective (CRC in header), files 6 through 10 are Vibrating the machine/cards/connections. good. By using the normal load and save commands, Raising the machine temperature (unplug the you can save files 1 through 4. When file 5 is reached blower). (defective file). remove the cartridge and manually move the tape forward past a load of the file 6, and repeat CAUTION the load and save operations for fields 6 through 10. Do not exceed 20 minutes. (Be sure to save to a different tape and mark as required.) By marking file 4 on the defective tape one K larger than it was, you can reuse the tape. All files past file 3 are now lost. Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit coolant). • Machine power switch must be down (off) when you remove the read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, N4). All other cards can be removed with power switch up (on). • You can remove the following cards/devices if they are not part of the failing operation or when you are trying to isolate to a failing operation: A2-1 /0 cable driver card B2-Communications card C2-Asynchronous communication/serial I/O card APL cards (C2, 02, 04, H4) if the failure is in BASIC -BASICcard C4 if the failure is in APL Read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, N4) 5103 Printer 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit 3-94 r ',,- j ( ( ( ( ( Tape Mark This procedure allows you to remark (initialize) a tape if file 1 is defective (CRC in header). Be sure to recover all files after file 1 before using this procedure. Recover all data possible before doing this. Use the file recovery procedure first. 1. Rewind the tape and do a UTIL or )LlB to ensure file 1 is defective. 2. Rewind the tape to the loed point (single hole in tape). 3. Remove the tape and wind the load point hole onto the right reel. 4. Jumper U10 to U08 on the back of the tape unit (control card pin side) (227). 5. Insert the tape and with a thin screw driver reach in from the right side of the tape unit and push the jackshaft to the left. This causes the tape to move forward. Move the tape forward about six inches. S. Release the jackshaft. 7. Remove the jumper. 8. Rewind the tape. 9. Mark the tape starting in file 1. Freelanee Aids Isolation aids that can be used when freelancing: 1. Disconnect one or both external I/O devices. CAUTION The last cabled I/O device must have a terminator or you will get proceS$ checks and bring-up diagnostic errors. The 5103 has its own internal terminator. 2. Remove all but 16K bytes of storage and uSe extra cards to isolate the problem. 3. Remove the A2 card to isolate the 5100 from the external I/O. 4. Remove the B2 card to isolate the 5100 from the communications and/or SID. 5. Disconnect the CRT connector if a display is not needed. 6. All 5100 cards except read/write storage can be pulled with power on. 7. All pins except voltage pins can be tied down. 8. Check all voltages. 9. Disconnect the fan motor to heat the machine and aggravate the failure. CAUTION Do not exceed 20 minutes of machine operation without fan running and COVl;lrs installed. Intermittent FaillJres Troubleshooting Guide 3-95 Card and Board Jumpers Failures on the 5100 which are hard to analyze might be associated with the jumper installed on the A 1 board, the G2 card, or the J2 card. In several cases, the jumpers have been missing or loose. When working with the A 1 board or its cards, be sure that the jumpers are installed correctly. If you are experiencing any of the following symptoms, check the jumpers: (See 209 for the correct jumpering of the logic cards.) 1. Process check on power up, but restart works properly. 2. No display; will not restart; meaningless data on the display. 3. Single row of digits across the bottom of the display, or blank display. 4. Unable to analyze process checks; or, more than one type of process check at the same time. 5. Wrong characters printed on the printer or displayed on the display. 3-96 Read/Write Head (007) Errors The following read/write head adjustment procedure might decrease 007 tape errors: 1. Remove the tape control card. 2. Loosen the read/write head. 3. Position the read/write head against the front and left of the mounting recess and tighten the mounting screw (facing the front of the machine). 4. Make sure the read/write head grounding wire clears the cartridge door when the cartridge is inserted. 5. Clean the read/write head with isopropyl alcohol part 220020C and lint free tissue. 6. Replace the tape control card and test the 5100 using the tape read test and MOl 860. Intermittent Process Checks If you are experiencing intermittent process checks on the 5100 and cannot determine the type or the cause, see Error Checking in the Theory section. When an error occurs, do not reset the machine. This will allow you to probe the failing line. Dropping Records If you are experiencing dropping records from files, or if you are getting 009 or 152 errors, check the file to see which recent changes were made and if the file is larger than the available workspace. If you load a data file into storage, get a 152 error, make changes or corrections to that file, and then save the file, all data beyond the available storage will be lost. To eliminate losing these files, change or update the files under program control. ,/ ( ( ( Attachment of a TV Monitor A modified TV set must have isolation between the primary line voltage and the frame and circuitry of the A standard TV set may be modified and used as a video set. This can be accomplished by using an isolation monitor for the 5100. transformer between your outlet line voltage and the voltage input to the TV set. This transformer should be Generally, modifying a standard TV set and using it as a permanently wired into the circuit. The new input power video monitor yields less satisfactory results than using plug must be a three-prong grounded plug with the a regular video monitor. This is because the same level ground connected to the chassis of the TV set. This of quality is not built into TV receivers as is found in grounding circuit must be electrically connected to the monitor class units. For example, the contrast and 5100 grounding circuit. resolution are not as good on a modified TV receiver; thus the image is not as sharp and is usually more Before the video input is connected to anything, it difficult to read. should be tested to verify that the connector's external shell is at ground potential and that no line voltage is However, if a TV receiver is modified and used as a present on either the external shell or the center video monitor, the following procedure must be conductor. observed, or exposure to a severe electric shock or damage to the 5100 may occur when the TV set is It is the responsibility of the TV modifier to ensure that connected to the IBM 5100. the input circuit meets the requirements of the 5100 output and will not damage the 5100. IBM will not modify the TV receiver. Three-Prong Isolation TV Grounded Plug Output Transformer Note: If a TV receiver is modified for use as a video monitor, IBM accepts no responsibility for safety precautions during conversion and hookup, for damages incurred to the TV receiver or 5100, or for the quality of the TV receiver as a video monitor. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-97 Monitor Video Out Service Check Set up the scope as follows: Use an x10probe Connect channel 1 to A 1 K2B04 (+ monitor video) Set these switches: Sync -internal Sweep -auto trigger CHl volts/div -0.1 volts Time/Div -10 p.s Slope -(-) minus Coupling - D.C. Note: Be sure to ground the scope probe. With the 5100 power switch set to ON and the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch set to DISPLAY REGISTERS, you should see the following pattern on the scope: B A 1---.------'" 641-1 s -----..,.1 Ground ------------------------------------------------------------------- A = 1.0 volts minimum to ground B = = 1.4 volts minimum to ground C 2.25 volts minimum to ground D = 63.3 p. seconds for one sweep of + monitor video The TV monitor, when connected, should provide a 75....1"".. termination load to the 5100 source ground. If several monitors are to be used, they should be daisy chained and the last monitor in the string terminated with 75-,,-. In some cases the 5100 may overdrive the TV monitor. It may, therefore, be necessary for the customer to add a 75-"'-.attenuator to the back of the 5100. 3-98 "-- ,/ PRINTER SYMPTOM INDEX Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Resolder the connections or replace the cable. Process checks with the 5103 Printer Check the solder connections on the or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit I/O interface connectors. attached to the 5100. ( Wavy print or 057 errors (vertical print The print head might be touching the Check that the emitter board and alignment). foam on the inside of the cover. pickup are adjusted properly. Remove a small portion of the foam if necessary. If the print head is moved manually, the characters will not line up with the characters printed before the interruption. 051,054, and 058 errors. Check the forms guide rack for proper Ground the forms guide rack. Be sure grounding. the screw fastening the ground strap to the forms guide is making good contact. None. Check the bottom of the printer for two orange shipping bolts. Check the screws on capacitors C 1 and C2 to make sure they are tight. Capacitors C1, C2, and C4 measure OK with no power applied. Carrier drive belt dirty. Check for missing +24 V and +10.5 V. Check for print wires protruding through the print head. Errors occur when running MDI 800. Replace the print emitter pickup card. (See the 5103 MIM.) Remove the orange shipping bolts using the 5103 unpacking instructions. Tighten all screws on these capacitors. Replace the C1 card. C1 breaks down under power. Clean or replace the belt. (See the 5103 MIM.) Replace transistor Q1 in the 51.03 Printer power supply. (See the 5103 MIM.) Replace the ribbon. Replace the print emitter pickup card. (See the 5103 MIM.) 056 and 057 errors when running MD1800. Forms gear binds on the top cover. 050 to 059 errors. ~ ,1 051 errors when attempting to print. 056 and 057 errors. Tighten the eccentric and/or print Check print head and carrier head. assembly. Make sure the carrier is mounted solidly to the guide bars. Also check the eccentric to be sure it is positioned properly. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-99 Symptom Intermittent 051 through 059 errors and other intermittent problems. Isolation Aid Fix .. Check all grounds on the 5103 Printer Check the AC power source for and on the 5100. proper grQUnEling. Check that the forms tractor unit is mounted securely on the printer. Check the frame ground to forms guide. Check the ground strap connections. Check the I/O interface cable grounds. Check for noise being generated by other equipment on the AC power line. r' Wavy printing. occurs, or left margin varies by one position. None. Place printer on a solid surface. Reposition the paper deflector on the left side. Replace the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.1 Tighten the power supply mounting screws. Fails to print in the first few positions None. in each line. All print wires fire at the left margin or the motor hangs up at the left margin. End of forms and forms motion problems. Check the emitter pickup for excessive solder that might be shorting out the print emitter board. Check the screws inthe 5100 power supply. Loose mounting screws can cause noise to be generated throughout the system. Forms feed fails to index. Check for binds and other mechanical Repair binds in the platen gears, idler problems. gears, forms motor/emitter assembly, or forms tractor unit. See the 5103 MIM for adjustments and replacement. Replace the broken idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter assembly. Adjust or replace the forms emitter assembly. Replace the forms feed emitter amplifier. I Adjust or replace the end of forms switch. Replace the motor driver card (A 1 B 1 I . Forms run backward. Fails to print. None. Do a copy display. Adjust the forms emitter. (See the 5103 MIM.1 Replace the printer adapter card. :3-100 : . Symptom Isolation Aid None. Fix Adjust or replace the end of forms switch. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust or replace the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust the copy control dial. ( ( Fails to print or head fails to move. Adjust the print head to platen clearance. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check for shorts between the print emitter and print emitter pickup. Print plot fails to print. Extra line spaces. Printer diagnostics should run OK. Replace the G2 card in the 5100. ( Check for excessive play in gear train. Adjust or repair excessive gear play. (See the 5103 MIM.) This causes incorrect partial lines. Adjust or replace the forms emitter. (See the 5103 MIM.) Variable line sl*lcing (forms creep). Excessive play in the gears. The forms emitter is not adjusted properly. Adjust the gear wink. Adjust the forms emitter. (See 5103 MIM.) The forms tractor unit is not mounted securely. (( Print line skewed or crooked. The forms tractor unit must be parallel with the platen and seated at all four mounted points. Remove the right side cover and loosen the two shaft screws 1 / 8 to 1 /4 turn to allow the forms tractor to seat properly. Check for cover interference. Uneven left margin. None. Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) 1:( Missing part of the character in print position 1. None. Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Overpri nti ng. Overprinting occurs if a print emitter error is detected while a line is being printed. If the data is correct. check for a defective or misadjusted print emitter or print emitter pickup. Adjust or replace the print emitter or the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-101 Symptom Backward printing '(mir~or image). Isolation Aid Check the parallelism between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Use the two small land patterns on the top right side of the printer to aid you in making this check. The distance between the land patterns and the print emitter pickup should not vary more than 0.025 inches (0.64 mm). Fix Reform the right side frame near the support shaft. Adjust the gap between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Also check that the print emitter moves freely as the horizontal fine adjustment knob is turned to both extremes. Check the ground locations. / I I Adjust or replace the end of the forms switch. (See the 5103 MIM.) I Replace the print head cable. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust or replace the print emitter or the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Light printing. Adjust the copy control dial. Replace the ribbon. Adjust the clearance between the print head and the platen. (See the 5103 MIM.) One end of a print line is darker. Check the A-frame alignment. (See the 5103 MIM.) The ribbon is not advancing. Check for broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches, and incorrect alignment of the ribbon drive gears. Also check that the ribbon feed roll release knob is in the proper position. Not enough tension on the two print Check for 700 to 900 grams of head springs. tension at the tip of the print head near the print wires. This measurement should be taken while the platen is removed and with the print head located near the center of the machine. Check for mechanical. binds, sticking, or other interference that would prevent the print head from making complete contact with the platen. Especially check the print head cable. Every other line has light printing. None. Check for broken ribbon drive lines. Check for a defective ribbon drive clutch. 3~102 I' Symptom Broken print wires. Isolation Aid To prevent breaking print wires: Set the copy control dial to the proper forms thickness. Instruct operators never to print over perforations, feed holes or the edge of the forms. Ensure that all fixes for ribbon jams are installed. Fix ( Printer blows fuses. ( Disconnect EC3 at the print head to Check for more than one active wire drive signal from the system. keep from blowing fuses; then measure the wire driver inputs at cable A1A3 with your meter. All Check for a defective signal cable. inputs should be at an up level of +4.5 to +5.5 Vdc or +1.4 to +20 Vdc. A down level indicates an active level. None. Replace A1A1 card and the Q1 transistor. +24 Vdc supply voltage is too high. Printing stops. Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for The problem can be caused by any of the +5 Vdc to the printer. the following: • Open capacitor C4. • Loose, broken, or poorly crimped wire between C4 and point 1 A. • Open circuit between point 1 A and test point V4. • Loose, broken, or poorly crimped wire between point 4F and capacitor C4. • Open land pattern between point 4F and test point GS. ( Replace the A 1 A 1 card. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-103 Symptom Isolation Aid Fix / Adjust, repair, or replace the end' of Printing stops intermittently or printer Disable the end of the forms switch by jumpering A1-A3D13 to prints backward when running forms switch, the wiring, or the diagnostics or programs. mechanism. (See the 5103 MIM.) Al-A3C08. Ifthe symptom disappears, the problem is in the end of the forms switch, the mechanism, or the wiring. Printing stops. Check the print emitter or print emitter pickup boards for warpage or contaminants. Adjust, repair, or replace as required. (See the 5103 MIM.) Component failures are not always Replace the forms feed photocell detected by the static checks. They assembly or forms feed emitter can, however, cause the printer to fail amplifier. (See the 5103 MIM.1 under dynamic (operating) conditions. An oscilloscope normally is required to detect these problems. Print head carrier stops near right side. Check that the belt clamp does not touch the print head stepper motor when the print head carrier is moved to the extreme right. None. Adjust the belt clamp as required. "" r· , / 051 error. Replace print head cable. Breaking print wires, jamming ribbon, Check for the correct part number on If the H2 card is part 1607112 and and jamming paper. the printer adapter card and the H2 the printer adapter card is part card. 1607124, the adapter card is for a 120 characters per second printer. Replace the printer adapter card with part 1607130, which is for a 60 characters per second printer. Solid 050 error. Probe the P13 pin on the printer adapter card to ensure 'EOF line is up. ON/OFF switch checks OK. Repair defective A 1 power board. ' " .. ,/ Intermittent 057 errors while printing. 051 errors. Print emitter board course adjustment Tighten print emitter board course screws are loose. adjustment screws. Check for +8.5 volts in the 5103. If the +8.5 volt power is missing, repair the connection on the A 1 power connector in the 5100. Replace the missing pin that holds the print head pulley to the stepper motor. When error codes are checked and 052 errors occur, replace defective forms emitter stepper motor. 057 and 059 errors. None. Forms movement problem with no error codes. Customer uses APL, and program is not checking for error codes. 3·104 ( ( Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Not printing some dots (on print plot All diagnostics run OK. Replace print head. only). Forms feeding fails to stop on 050 None. Repair bouncing EOF switch or adjust error. EOF switch. Missing dots, or extra dots printed. The 5103 may add or drop a Replace F2 card in the 5100. complete vertical line for a character and have no error halts. Solid 052 errors. Copy display fails. Replace F2 card in the Sioo. Print misalignment vertically. When running MOl 800, the second Check for binds or replace the ribbon or third line of Hs are misaligned drive roll assembly. vertically. 051 errors. Check for voltages dropping when the Replace C2, C3, or C4 capacitors. error occurs. Intermittent or solid 052 errors. Probe the signal on the printer Replace the A2 card or cable in the adapter card pin C5J 13. It should be 5100. pulsing. Failure to print or 057 errors occur Check for +5 volts at TP-V5. Replace shorted emitter board. when trying to power up a 5100 APL machine with the 5103 printer turned on. Left margin varies. Printer recently changed from an 80 Ensure that the H2 card is part characters per second to a 120 1607126. characters per second machine. Intermittent 056 errors. Fails when printing right to left past Repair print head cable. position 100. 057 errors or wavy print. Print head does not move smoothly. Replace print emitter board. 052 errors. Check 'forms emitter A' line at pin Replace forms emitter stepper motor V07 and 'forms emitter B' line at pin assembly. S12. Both lines should be pulsing when the printer is spacing paper. Carrier belt not tracking correctly. Belt is improperly adjusted. Move print head to the right margin and adjust the carrier belt. Paper jams. Not a new style printer with the Check for bent pins on the tractor ON/OFF switch on the front. assembly. Check to see the ECA 11 (EC 812672) is installed. Print plot has misaligned dots. None. Use paper with a thickness of 0.0030 to 0.0075 inches (0.075 to 0.188 mm). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-105 PRINTEft SERVICE TIPS Reset Signal Line Checkout A 'reset' signal line that is not functioning pl'OJ)erly will not always cause printer failures. Consequently, there is no particular symptom associated with this problem. If you suspect that the 'rl!!sef signal line is not functioning properly. use the fbllowing J)rocedure to check out the 'reset' signal in the printer: 1. Power down the 5100. 2. Do not power down the printer. 3. Probe B1-84, 812 (-Reset). 4. Power up the 5100. 5. Check that the probe DOWN light is ori. 6. Press the HOLD key. Press the CMD key and the + key to copy the display. 7. Check that the probe UP light is on. B. Power down the printer. 9. Check that the probe DOWN light is on. ~rint Emitter Timing Using MOl 805 If you are doing left margin adjustments, run MOl 805. This MOl checks the timing of the left margin. You can also loop on step to theck for intermittent errors. If you do the print emitter pickup adjustment 340, do the left margin adjustment 343 and run MOl 800 to verify the adjustments. 3-106 Forms Emitter Timing Scope Procedure 1. Remove the forms tractor unit and the paper. 2. Move the copy control dial to eliminate printing on the . platen. 3. Load printer diagnostic MOl BOO. Loop on the step number that indicates quick forms movement test (PT01V5). / 4. Place the scope lead On U07 on the printer adapter card (forms emitter A). Display one pulse on the screen. Good: Adjust until display looks like this: Bad: __ -..o!J Bad: u n 1 1.. --~"---- Forms Jams The following items can cause forms jams and incorrect forms movement: There is incorrect pressure plate clearance on the forms tractor. The paper deflector is too close to the platen. The cut form guide on the left rear top cover is not flipped back or it is used with continuous forms. The paper path is incorrect. See the BASIC or APL reference manuals for correct forms feed paths. . ... ./ Forms are being used that are thicker than specified. The maximum forms thickness allowed is 0.018 inch (4.572 mm). See the Form Design Reference Guide, GA24-348B. The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen. The forms tractor unit is not parallel with the platen and is not fully seated at all four mounting points. All the pressure rolls do not contact the platen evenly. Ribbon Jams Check the following items if you are experiencing frequent ribbon jams: The ribbon shield is not adjusted properly. There is improper tracking of the ribbon through the ribbon feed rolls. The ribbon should not be above the rollers more than 0.010 to 0.015 inch (0.254 to 0.381 mm). If the ribbon is above the rollers, one of the following could be the cause: • The rollers are not adjusted properly. Check that the rollers are the same height and are not cocked. f • The print head cover is hitting the print cable near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left side of the head cover to rise and lift the ribbon off the print head. If this condition is present, cut a small portion from the head cover where it hits the head cable. • The ribbon box may be positioned too low. Loosen the two screws holding the ribbon box to the carrier (one on the left side and one in the bottom of the box), and raise or lower the box for proper ribbon tracking through the ribbon rollers. Retighten the screws. ( -The ribbon drive rolls are sticking. Remove and clean the rollers. There are metal spacers in the ribbon roller assembly between the rubber rolls and the plastic housing. Replace the rollers if either spacer is missing (one at the top of the rollers and one at the bottom). -The print wires are protruding beyond the face of the print head by more than 0.002 inch (0.0508 mm). The copy control dial is improperly set. The dial should be set for good print quality on the last (/ copy and no smudging on the first copy. The numbers on the copy control dial do not correspond to the number of parts in the form. (~: Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-107 5103 FORMS FEED STEPPER MOTOR/EMITTER 5. Connect the probe power lead (red) to test point TIMING V5 and the black lead to G6. 6. Place the Printer Adapter card in the service Adjustment position on machines with EC 579623 or EC 579920. Refer to the 5103 MIM (312). Two techniques are available for the adjustment of the emitter timing: the general logic probe method and a 7. Probe A2-U07 on the B1 board with the probe program that must be entered manually. The logic probe ground lead on P08. On machine~ without EC method provides sufficient accuracy for normal printer 579623 or EC 579920, probe TPA on the forms applications, but, print/ plot applications that require feed emitter amplifier card. with the probe reverse forms motion may need to use the programming ground lead on test point G8. technique. 8. Power up. General Logic Probe (GLP) Adjustment Method 9. Slide the photocell down as far as possible. 1. Power down. 10. Slowly slide the assembly up until the probe UP light comes on. 2. Remove the printer cover. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). Note: If the UP light is on with the photocell down as far as possible, slide the assembly up until the 3. Connect a jumper wire between test points FMA UP light goes out and then comes back on. and G7 • (forms motor driver A to ground). a. Hold the photocell assembly firmly in place and a. Move the black wire from TPB2-6C to tighten the two screws. TPB2-3C. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). b. Verify the adjustment as follows: b. Move the red wire from TPB2-5B to TPB2-6C. -Apply a small amount of forward force on the platen knob. The probe should stay at 4. Loosen the photocell assembly (two screws II the up level when you remove your hand behind the motor) so that the assembly will slide from the knob. but not move by itself. -Apply a small amount of backward force on the platen knob. The probe should stay at a down level when you remove your hand from the knob. c. Readjust if necessary. d. Power down. e. Move the red wire from TPB2-6C back to TPB2-5B. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). f. Move the black wire from TPB2-3C back to TPB2-6C. ,/ TPB 0 / TPAO Right End VieVli 3-108 11. Remove the probe and jumper wire. Reinstall the ( printer adapter card on machines that required removal. 12. Reinstall the printer cover and forms tractor unit. 13. Check the adjustment by running MOl 800; readjust if necessary. ( Note: If adjusted incorrectly, the forms motor might run backwards. ( Manual Entry Programming Method This technique is similar to the 5110 MOl 0800 emitter adjustment routine and may be used on both the 5100 and the 5110 computer systems. Initial set-up for the adjustment should include the installation of the tractor assembly and the insertion and engagement of paper under the platen with platen rolls engaged. Initial entries on the 5100 computer system are: 1. Load OCP1 normal mode (See DCP 1 Normal Mode in this section.) 2. Alter read/write storage locations 3F70 through 3FFF by entering the data given in the data table that follows. 3. Press the spacebar after all characters have been entered. 4. Enter: BR 3F70. 5. Press the EXECUTE key. Refer to the following material on Test Description in this section. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-109 DATA TABLE Read/Write Storage Location Data , 3F70 8541 8645 8700 A005 858B 868A 8740 840C 3F80 8000 0204 15EO OF54 OB01 0500 C003 AOO5 3F90 1560 OF64 FBFF 05AE OC01 1500 1590 0904 3FAO 05EE COOB OE47 OE45 D101 1593 01E6 5108 3FBO 159F 8804 CE45 CE4E 0847 0807 01A4 01E7 3FCO C185 AOO7 7FBO OAE4 CMOC A011 FCOO 01CC 3FOO 01C6 C103 0094 OF74 7FBO CB04 F005 1510 3FEO DC01 8000 FCOO 01CC 01C6 C103 F009 OD47 3FFO 0024 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Test Description: When the program has begun to execute, the 5103 platen should be rotating back and forth. The accuracy of the emitter adjustment is displayed with a series of arrows. If there are no binds in the carriage and the emitter is in adjustment, approximately 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be pointing up, and 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be point down. If the lines of arrows are not with ± three arrows of being the same length, the forms emitter needs to be adjusted. If the print/ plot feature is on the system using the printer, the emitter should be adjusted to give within ± one arrow of the same length lines. Loosen the forms emitter and move it slightly in the direction of the greater number of arrows. The length of the lines of arrows is an indication of the relative freedom from binds in the platen. The pattern of arrows shown below would require a slight downward adjustment of the emitter to obtain a ± one arrow adjustment accuracy. tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt ttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~+++~+++++~~+~~~+~~++++++~+~+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++~++ ~~~~+~~~+~~~~~~~+~+++++~~+++~+~ 3-110 ( ( Saving the Manually Entered Diagnostic Program: The diagnostic program may be saved on a tape cartridge that can be reserved for this purpose. Do not store the program on the diagnostic tape or in a used file. Insert a scratch tape cartridge with a file marked for at least 1 K bytes. , GENERAL PROBLEM SOLVING General Procedures General procedures to resolve intermittent and miscellaneous problems follow: • Whenever possible, identify the problem area (such as forms feed, print head, ribbon feed). The customer-reported symptom may be used to do this, especially if the diagnostics run without error. If a problem area can be identified, refer to the Diagnostic Aids section of this manual and select an MDI pertaining to the area or problem. • Check the mechanical parts for loose screws, broken springs, loose parts, binds, interference, or other visual problems. When possible, operate the mechanical parts manually to find clues to the problem. • Ensure that all connectors, cards, wires, and jumpers are securely plugged. • Check all connectors, taper pins, and other terminals for poor crimps, defective parts, excessively loose contacts, or other noticeable problems. • Check for wires or cables that might be pinched or are intermittently shorting. • Check for broken wires that might break contact intermittently. • Check for discoloring of the circuit cards that might indicate overheating of a component. After any repairs or corrections, run the diagnostics to verify proper operation. To store locations 3F70 through 3FFF, perform the following steps: 1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode. Enter: C Hold down the CMD key and press 9. Enter: 3F70 3FFF 0001 OO4B 0000 Press the EXECUTE key. 2. ( 3. 4. 5. This program will write the data stored from 3F70 through 3FFF into file 0001 of the tape cartridge. A different file may be used but the 0001 must be changed to a different file number and entered in hexadecimal to identify the different file. ( Loading the Forms Emitter Test Program from Tape: Perform the following steps to load the test program from the tape cartridge: 1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode. Enter: C Hold down the CMD key and press 8 on the numeric key pad. Enter: 3F70 0001 0000 Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will be loaded form file 0001 [hex] of the tape cartridge.) Enter: BR 3F70 Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will begin to execute.) Note: The file number must be in hex. 2. 3. 4. 5. ( -. 6. 7. ( If a file other than file 1 was specified when the program was stored on the tape cartridge, then you must specify that file by using a hex number during the ~" .. entry of the commands given above. Step 4 specifies file 1 with the hex byte 0001. This should be changed --/ to properly identify the file used on the tape cartridge. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-111 General Problems and Service Hints • If the forms are jamming, tearing, or feeding incorrectly: There might be incorrect clearance between the chain guide and the cover on the forms tractor unit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (325). The paper deflector might be too close to the platen. The deflector is held up by four prongs (two prongs on each side); these prongs should be formed down so the deflector rests On the flat springs between the pressure rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (320). The cut forms guide might not be flipped back as it should be (on old style machines) when yOu use continuous forms. The cover might not be aligned properly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen. There should be a minimum of 0.008 inches (0.20 mm) clearance between the ribbon shield and the platen when the copy control dial is set at O. Refer to the 5103 MIM (366). Forms might be thicker than' the allowed maximum of 0.018 inches (0.46 mm). Refer to the Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488. The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with the platen and might not be fully seated at all four mounting points. Improper se8tingis usually caused by a twisted forms tractor unit. If the forms tractor unit is stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Ensure that the forms are inserted correctly. Refer to BASIC Reference Guide, SA21-9217 orAPL Reference Guide, SA21-9213 for the method of inserting forms. The forms feeding might be improved if you remove the cut forms guide and route the forms over the printer cover rather than over the plastic rollers. • If the forms feed fails to index correctly: There might be mechanical binds in the platen gears, the idler gear, the forms motor/emitter assembly, or the forms tractor unit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (324, 326, 327, 328, 329, or 330). -The idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter assembly might be broken. -The forms emitter assembly might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). The forms feed amplifier might be defective. The forms feed amplifier might be located on a small card either mounted on the fOrms motor/emitter assembly or mounted on the printer adapter card. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). The end of forms switch might be defective or out of adjustment, or it might have loose wires on the terminals. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334). Card A1B1 might be defective. Refer to the 5103 MIM (304). • If the form feeds continuously: This problem usually pertains to the 5100. The forms feed motor in the printer will not advance unless it receives drive pulses from the 5100. Shorted or open signal lines in the 5103 will not cause continuous indexing. • If there are extra line spaces or the forms space or skip too far: The 5103 requires 16 stepper motor pulses to advance one line space. If the form advances more than one complete line space, the problem is in the 5100. If the form advances part of a line space, the forms emitter might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). There might be too much play in the gear train. Refer to the 5103 MIM (327). • If the form creeps and causes variable line spacing: There might be too much play in the gear train. Refer to the 5103 MIM (327). The forms emitter might be out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). Be sure to use the 5103 M I M at level 2 or later for the correct adjustment. The forms tractor unit might not be mounted securely. • If the form runs backwards: The forms emitter might be out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). I ,..-, "' . ./ ",-j 3-112 • If the printed line is skewed or crooked: The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with the platen and might not be fully seated at all four mounting points. a. Improper seating is usually caused by a twisted forms tractor unit. If the forms tractor unit is stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover (- and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. b. There might be interference between the printer cover and the forms tractor unit which does not allow the forms tractor unit to seat completely. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). ( • If the ribbon jams: The ribbon shield might not be installed correctly and the ribbon might not be tracking below the opening in the shield. Readjust the shield to obtain a minimum clearance of 0.007 inches (0.18 mm) between the print head and the shield at the bottom. Refer to the 5103 MIM (366). Check for proper tracking of the ribbon through the ribbon feed rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (376). The ribbon should not be more than 0.015 inches (0.39 mm) above the feed rolls. If the ribbon is too far above the feed rolls, one of the following might be the cause: a. The feed rolls might not be adjusted properly. ( They should be the same height and not cocked. b. The print head cover might be hitting the cable near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left side of the cover to rise and lift the ribbon off the print head. If this condition exists, cut a small piece from the cover where it hits the cable. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). c. The ribbon box might be positioned too low. To raise the ribbon box, loosen the two screws that hold the ribbon box to the carrier (one screw on the left side and one screw in the bottom of the box). Then raise the box for proper tracking and tighten the screws. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). The ribbon might be sticking to the feed rolls. Remove and clean the feed rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (374). (-- Check for metal spacers between the feed rolls and the feed roll carrier. There should be a spacer at both the top and the bottom of the feed roll. Replace the feed rolls if both spacers are not installed. Refer to the 5103 MIM (376). Ensure that the print wires do not protrude more than 0.002 inches (0.051 mm) beyond the face of the print head. Improper setting of the copy control dial can lead to ribbon jams. The dial should be set for a good print quality on the last copy and no smudging on the first copy. The numbers on the dial do not correspond to the number of parts in the form. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). • If the printer fails to print or the print head fails to move: The end of forms switch might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334). The print emitter or print emitter pickup might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and 341). The forms feed might not have indexed after the last print line. Refer to the service hints above labeled If the Forms Feed Fails to Index Correctly. The copy control dial might not be correctly set for the thickness of the copy. The print head to platen clearance might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360). There might be a short circuit between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). The only place the two should join is at the plastic pads. • Overprinting: Overprinting occurs if a print emitter error is detected while a line is being printed. If no error occurs and the printed data is correct and in the proper format, check for a print emitter or a print emitter pickup that is defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and 341). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-113 • Light printing: The copy control dial might not be set correctly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). The ribbon might need to be replaced. -The clearance between the platen and the print head might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360). There might not be enough tension on the two print head springs. There should be 700 to 900 grams of tension at the tip of the print head near the print wires. This measurement should be taken with the platen removed and the print head near the center of the machine. Check for mechanical binding, sticking, or interference that would keep the print head from moving all the way forward toward the platen. Especially check to ensure that the print head cable does not interfere. The ribbon might not be advancing. Check for broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches, and misalignment of the ribbon drive gears. Check to ensure that the ribbon feed roll release knob is in the proper position. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). If one end of the printed line is darker than the other, check the A-frame alignment. Also check for a bent platen shaft. Refer to the 5103 MIM (333). 3-114 • If every other line prints light: -One of the ribbon drive lines might be broken. Refer to 5103 MIM (301). -One of the ribbon drive clutches might be defective. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). • If the left margin is uneven: -The left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (343). Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302, 340, and 341). • If all the print wires fire in the left margin area: Replace the print emitter pickup. Refer to 5103 MIM (302 and 341). If part of the character in print position 1 is missing: The left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (343). -Check the adjustments of the print emitter and print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302, 340, and 341). • Broken print wires: -The following might cause breakage of the print wires: a. Improper setting of the copy control dial for the thickness of the forms used. b. Printing over the perforations, the feed holes, or the edge of the forms. c. Ribbon jams, which can cause the print wires to catch on the ribbon and break the wires. Ensure that fixes or engineering changes for ribbon jams are installed. • If the print head carrier stops when it approaches the right side: Ensure that the belt clamp does not contact the print head stepper motor when the print head carrier is moved to the extreme right. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). • If the 24 Vdc supply voltage is too high: Replace card AlA 1 and the transistor Q 1. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). • If intermittent problems exist which are caused by poor grounding: Proper grounding is necessary for proper operation of the printer. Check the following list to help find intermittent problems: a. Ensure that the customer has provided the proper grounding for the 5100 (the green wire goes to ground). b. Ensure that the I/O signal cables have a good ground at the 5100. c. Ensure that the forms tractor unit is set securely on the printer. d. Ensure that the wire forms rack is electrically connected to the printer frame. A resistance of ( 100K ohms or less between the forms rack and the printer frame is acceptable. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). e. It may be necessary to ground the forms rack to the printer with a ground wire. f. Check for electrical noise generated from other machines in the area, or for electrically noisy machines connected to the same AC line as the 5100 computer. • If printing intermittently stops: Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for the +5Vdc supply to the printer. The printer might not operate if this capacitor is not in the circuit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). Check for the following: a. Capacitor C4 might be open. b. The wire betweeen C4 and test point A 1 might be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp. c. The land pattern between test point A 1 and test point V4 might be open. d. The wire between capacitor C4 and test point 4F might be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp. e. The land pattern between test point 4F and test point G6 might be open. Refer to the 5103 MIM (386). The circuit card A 1 A 1 contains most of the control circuits forthe printer. This card may be replaced in an attempt to fix intermittent problems. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-11& 3-116 This page intentionally left blank. INTRODUCTION 4-3 I/O Devices 4-3 The 5103 Printer 4-3 f~ The 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit 4-3 Features 4-3 Serial I/O Adapter Feature 4-3 Asynchronous Communications Feature 4-3 Katakana Feature . 4-4 Models 4-4 ( Functional Units 4-4 Keyboard 4-4 Display Adapter Card 4-4 Controller 4-4 Storage. 4-4 Base I/O Card . 4-4 I/O Cable Driver 4-4 Microprogramming 4-4 INTERNAL OPERATION OF THE 5100 . 4-5 5100 Internal Operation Diagram 4-6 5100 Data Flow and Parity Checking 4-7 Keyboard and Control Panel 4-9 Switches and Controls 4-9 Lights. 4-10 Keyboard Data Flow . 4-10 Keyboard Operation 4-10 Keyboard Code Translation 4-10 ( Key Functions 4-11 Keyboard Error Checking 4-12 Microprogramming 4-12 CONTROLLER 4-15 5100 Controller Data Flow 4-15 5100 Controller Description 4-16 Storage Read Bus and Storage Write Bus 4-16 Data Bus In 4-16 Data Bus Out 4-16 Storage Address Bus 4-16 Internal Controller Organization 4-16 Machine Cycles 4-17 Interrupts 4-17 Error Checking . 4-18 I/O Data Flow Control 4-19 ( Read Only Storage 4-19 Read/Write Storage 4-23 Storage Data Flow 4-25 Storage Address Register 4-26 Storage Read Bus 4-26 Storage Write Bus 4-26 Storage Error Checking 4-26 Base I/O Card . 4-26 (~ I/O Cable Driver Card 4-27 TAPE 4-28 Tape Unit Overview 4-28 Tape Data Flow 4-29 Tape Operations 4-29 Tape Drive Components . 4-29 ( Tape Cartridge . 4-31 Tape Writing and Formatting 4-32 Contents Tracks 4-33 Files 4-33 Records. 4-34 Tape Position Markers 4-37 Tape Motion 4-38 Forward Tape Motion 4-38 Reverse Tape Motion 4-38 Operations 4-38 Mark 4-38 Find 4-39 Read 4-39 Write 4-39 Rewind 4-39 Backspace. 4-39 Tape Adapter . 4-40 Tape Adapter I/O Lines 4-41 Error Checking 4-44 DISPLAY. 4-45 Display Adapter . 4-45 Display Adapter Controls 4-46 TV Monitor. 4-49 POWER 4-50 AC Power Box 4-50 Power Supply PC Board 4-51 DC Power Distribution . 4-51 Power Supply Protection 4-51 Referenced Voltage 4-51 5100 OPERATIONS 4-52 Power On Procedure, Initialization, and Bring-up Diagnostic 4-52 I/O Operation and Data Transfer from Keyboard to Display and Printer 4-52 Contents 4-1 2024年11月6日发(作者:欧阳高) DCP1 NORMAL MODE DCP1 normal mode can be entered during a customer job in order to display and alter data. Control of the 5100 can then be returned to the customer program and execution of the job can continue. You can return to the customer job after displaying or altering data, or you can continue from normal mode to diagnostic mode. Once the DCP1 diagnostic mode is initiated on the keyboard, you cannot return to the customer job. You can, however, choose to go from the DCP1 diagnostic mode to DCP2 or do a RESTART. To load the DCP1 normal mode: 1. Press the HOLD key. 2. Press and hold the CMD key and press the - (minus) key on the numeric keyboard. To exit' from the DCP1 normal mode: 1. Press and hold the CMD key; then press the + (plus) key on the numeric keyboard. When DCP1 is loaded, the top eight lines on the display are cleared, and the header DCP1 is placed in the middle of both halves of the top line. The header is repeated in both halves of the display; it will appear even if the L32-64-R32 switch is set to display a 32.,.character line. The cursor flashes (or blinks) whenever the keyboard is operational. [ Depl DCPl ) 'When the DCP1 normal mode is exited, the only change in the display is the repositioning of the cursor to the bottom of the display screen. 3-18 / Display ( Display is a DCP1 normal mode function. To use this function, you must load DCP and then press the D key and enter the starting address of the location of the read/write storage that you want to display. The display now shows 32 sequential locations of read/write storage starting with the input address. Scroll up (t) displays the next 16 bytes, and scroll down (+) displays the previous 16 bytes. The SPACE bar returns control to DCP1. To exit from DCP1 press and hold the CMD key; then press the + (plus) key on the numeric keyboard. To display storage locations using a different starting address, enter D and the new starting address. Entry Format ( Example: nCPl D 0120 ADDR DCPl. 0120 0130 0000 OB56 0l.B2 OOl8 019C OOIA OOlD 0272 OlAO 0276 OIAl. 027A 0000 027E 0000 0282 Valid Input Keys Valid Input Keys Calls the display function to display read/write storage. Scrolls forward; displays the next 32 bytes. Scrolls backward; displays the previous 32 bytes. SPACE bar Cancels the requested fUnctidn. To turn off the PROCESS CHECK light, press the RESTART key. Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode. D t CMD and * or x (multiply on the numeric keyboard) CMD and + (plus on the numeric keyboard) 0-9, A-F Enters hex characters. Returns to the customer program if the DCP1 diagnostic mode has not been called. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-19 Alter Alter is a DCP1 normal mode function. In order to use this function, you must first load DCP1 by holding the CMD key and pressing the HOLD key; then hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key. To select the alter function, press A; then enter the starting address of the location of the read/write storage you want to alter. After you enter a starting address, the existing contents of 32 bytes of read/write storage are displayed on two lines of 16 bytes each. New data can be entered on the top line only. The display is altered with each keystroke. Entry Format New data is entered into read/write storage in two ways: • Press the EXECUTE key. • Enter the 16th byte. In both cases, the top line is read/write storage and the display is advanced one line to atlow additional entries. This option allows you to enter a program that ed immediately. Pressing the SPACE bar terminates the alter function and returns control to DCP1. To exit from DCP1, hold the CMD key and press the + (plus) key on the numeric keyboard. A xxxx Example: DCP1 A '+000 '+000 '+010 DCP1 / ADDR ". j 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Valid Input Keys Valid Input Keys A Calls the alter function to alter read/ write storage. Scrolls forward and displays the next 16 bytes. Scrolls backward and displays the previous 16 bytes. EXECUTE Enters the altered hex data into read/write storage. Cancels the requested function. ./ t SPACE bar CMD and * or x (multiply on the numeric keyboard) CMD and + (plus on the numeric keyboard) Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode. 0-9, A-F -+ Enters hex characters. Spaces forward. Backspaces. Returns to the customer program if the DCP1 diagnostic mode has not been called. +- 3-20. ( (- . (/ DCP1 DIAGNOSTIC MODE To enter DCP1 diagnostic mode, first call in the DCP1 program. Entry into diagnostic mode is made through the keyboard by pressing and holding the CMD key and pressing the * (asterisk) or x (multiply) key on the numeric keyboard. Entering these keys out of sequence cancels the requested function. All address specifications for the various diagnostic functions are forced to an even halfword boundary. Recovery from an error is accomplished by starting the routine over again. Recovery from a process check is accomplished by pressing RESTART. Exit from DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART. DCP1 Diagnostic Mode Functions Branch: This function is used in the tape read tests and, at times, when receiving plant assistance. Branch exits DCP1 diagnostic mode to execute code located in executable ROS or in read/write storage. When exiting from the diagnostic mode, the keyboard is activated to accept the CMD and ATTN combination. This key combination cancels any operation and returns control to DCP1 diagnostic mode (unless the branch was to another keyboard control routine). Therefore, when branching to tape read or DCP2, any of the branch operations can be cancelled. The BH (branch and halt) halts processing when the halt address is reached in the instruction address register of level 0; a shift and ATTN key combination restores the microinstruction at the halted address and forces level 0 to a halt. At this time, the 5100 Portable Computer should be placed in step mode. Pressing ATTN again resumes processing in level 0 following completion of the step mode in level 3. The space bar returns control to DCP1 diagnostic mode. Valid Branch Input Keys BE Branch to executable ROS address. BH Branch to read/write storage address and halt at the specified address. BR Branch to read/write storage address with no halt. EXECUTE Execute the preceding branch instruction and exit from the branch routine but re- main in DCP1 diagnostic mode. DCP1 normal mode keys are also valid in DCP1 diagnostic mode. Branch Display Formats Branch in executable ROS with no halt: BE ROS@ xxxx EXEC - Branch in read/write storage with no halt: BR MEM@ xxxx EXEC - Branch in read/write storage with halt: BH MEM@ xxxx HALT@ yyyy EXEC - xxxx = Branch address in hex. yyyy = Halt address in hex. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-21 Call: This function allows you to load the tape read test into read/write storage for execution, and allows you to execute the op code, read/write storage, and ROS test routines from executable ROS. Call also provides tape copy and storage dump functions. Once DCP1 diagnostic mode is entered, use the following keying sequence to use the call function: 1. Press C. 2. Hold the CMD key and press a numeric key to load the call routines. Use the numeric keyboard for entering digits 0-9. 3. Press EXECUTE. Each call routine is identified by a digit (0·9) preceded by CMD. The following list shows the format for all routines and their names: Routine Name CMDO Tape Read Test CMD 1 Tape Read Test CMD2 OP Code Loop Test CMD3 ROS Read CRC Loop Test CMD4 ROS Address Loop Test CMD5 Read/Write Storage Test CMD6 Not Assigned CMD 7 Not Assigned CMD8 Tape to Storage Dump CMD 9 Storage Dump to Tape 3·22 Tape Read Tests -CMD 0 and CMD 1 CMDO C TAPE TEST EXEC - This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It performs the same tests as the CMD 1 routine except the forward motion and reverse motion test. Therefore, this test provides a faster access to the DCP2 program. Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by holding CMD and pressing ATTN. Exit DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART. CMD 1 C TAPE DrAG EXEC - This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It also tests the forward and reverse motion. This test provides access to the DCP2 program. Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by holding CMD and pressing ATTN. Exit from DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART. / Loading ( CAUTION Do not insert the CE diagnostic cartridge until instructed to do so on the display. The tape might be erased if inserted too soon. Refer to DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode in this section. Hold CMD and press HOLD ( Hold CMD and press -(minus) on the numeric keyboard Hold CMD and press • or x (multiply) on the numeric keyboard Press C Hold CMD and press 1 on the numeric keyboard Press EXECUTE You can return to DCP1 diagnostic mode from the tape read test by holding CMD and pressing ATTN. The tape read test is called into read/write storage when CMD 1 is entered. Pressing EXECUTE starts the test. Some of the tests in the tape read test require answers to questions put on the display. Follow the instructions given and answer the questions carefully. The following message is also displayed during some of the tests: PRESS EXECUTE, R, OR L EXECUTE = go to next test R = retry this test L = loop on this test Do NOT press EXECUTE, R, or L until directed to do so by the instructions. The characters DCP2 MENU appear on the display when the tape read test is finished. The program can be rerun by preSSing ATTN, entering BR 2Boo, and pressing EXECUTE. However, once another program is selected from the DCP2 menu, the tape read test cannot be run unless it is recalled from nonexecutable ROS via DCP1. Retry Test Pressing R retries the present test once. If an error exists after pressing R, the following error message appears on the display screen: ERROR XXX E 80 GOTO MAP 0300 Loop On Test If an error occurs, pressing L causes the program to loop on the present test. After pressing L, a F (fail) or a P (pass) is displayed on the bottom right side of the display screen. The F indicates that an error exists and . the P indicates that an error does not exist. To stop looping, hold CMD and press ATTN. This stops the tape read test. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-23 Rerun Test To run the tape read test again (since it is still in read/write storage), do the following: Remove the CE diagnostic cartridge Enter BR (branch to read/write storage) Enter 2BOO (starting address of the tape read test) Press EXECUTE Follow the instructions on the display (some loops will not have instructions) The CE diagnostic cartridge must be removed before retrying the tape read· test. Loop On Error Code A specific test within the tape read tests can be looped I by holding CMD, pressing ATTN, and altering location 280C to the error number of the test (allows you to loop on a specific test any time). Looping in this manner is the same as pressing L when the instruction press EXECUT1:, R, or L is displayed. Refer to the tape read test and auxiliary tape MDI routines in this section for error numbers. 3-24 For example, to loop on error 0912: Hold CMD and press ATTN Remove the CE diagnostic cartridge Alter location 2BOC to the error number as. follows: Press A Enter 2BOC Enter 0912 Press the space bar Enter BR 2800 (starting address of tape read tests) Press EXECUTE The tape read test will execute normally until the test you selected is reached. Follow the instructions on the display. Tests run prior to the first display will loop without displaying instructions. Display messages: F (fail) -error ,/ P (pass) -no error Looping stops when you hold CMD and press ATTN. Op Code Loop Test -CMD 2 ROS Address Loop Test -CMD 4 ( ( C OP CODE EXEC - This routine tests all controller microinstructions. Numerous IAR (instruction address register) hang points localize specific failing processor operations and monitor C ROS ADR EXEC - This test sends nonexecutable ROS addresses to the ROS adapter, reads back several halfwords of data, and then reads back the address to verify that it advances storage accesses at the RDR for improper parity. f This test repeats until halted by the operator (if accessed via DCP1). When accessed by the bring up program, it is not repeated. ROS Read CRC Loop Test -CMD 3 C ROS READ EXEC - The ROS test checks if the machine can address and fetch data from each ROS module relating to the language (APL or BASIC) of the machine. While the test runs, each byte of data in each ROS module is read and CRC sums are generated and compared. Compare failures, end the test, and post an error on the display. Parity errors from the ROS adapter are detected on the bus in to the control unit and cause a process check. Before executing this routine, the read/write storage must be set to zero at locations 0100 through 010D. Refer to the DCP1 alter function for the procedure. Exit from DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART. ( correctly. Send and read back continues until 12 different ROS addresses are used for the selected language (BASIC or APL). This test loops until halted by the operator (if called via DCP1). When called by the bring up program, it does not loop. Read/Write Storage Test -CMD 5 C RAM TEST EXEC - This routine stores data in all locations of read/write storage and then reads it all out and compares it one address at a time. It then shifts the data one position and loops on the test. If allowed to run, all read/write storage addresses are tested for each possible data combination. The test runs until the operator stops it by using the CMD and ATTN key combination. Either a process check or a customer halt condition can occur. RFLO (register F in level 0) (refer to Display Registers in this section) contains the storage location that was being addressed at the time of the failure. The suspected read/write storage card that caused the failure can be identified by using the following table: 0000 to 3FFF K2, K4 (read/write storage) cards 4000 to 7FFF L2, L4 (read/write storage) cards 8000 to BFFF M2, M4 (read/write storage) cards COOO to FFFF N2, N4 (read/write storage) cards The read/write storage cards K2, L2, M2, and N2 are the even addresses and card K4, L4, M4, and N4 are the odd addresses. Exit from DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·25 Tape to Storage Dump -CMD 8 C LOAD MEM@ FILE# SELT EXEC - This routine can be used to load DCP2 directly from tape or to copy individual files. • To load DCP2: 1. Load DCP1 -diagnostic mode. 2. Insert the CE diagnostic cartridge. 3. Enter C CMD S. 4. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@ OSOO. 5. Enter the tape file number, FILE# 0001 (number in hex). 6. Enter storage selection, SEL T 0000. 7. Press EXECUTE. S. Enter BR OSOO. 9. Press EXECUTE to run DCP2. • To copy individual files or to load a file into storage: 1. Press and hold the CMD key. 2. Press the -(minus) key. 3. Press and hold the CMD key. 4. Press the x or * (multiply) key. 5. Press the C key. 6. Press and hold the CMD key. 7. Press the S key. S. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@ OSOO.· 9. Enter the tape file number, FILE# xxxx (number in hex). 10. Enter the storage selection, SEL T 0000. 11. Press the EXECUTE key. The file number specified in step 9 is now loaded in memory starting at position OSOO. See Storage Dump to Tape -CMD 9 in this section to load this file onto another tape. 3-26 Storage Dump to Tape -CMD 9 C DUMP MEM@ _ END@ - F I LE#- TYPE- SELT EXEC - This routine dumps storage from M~M@ to END@ onto the tape cartridge, FILE# (hex), if the TYPE is identified. There are two types of files that can be dumped: Type 0011 is the tape copy function that labels the tape file header on the tape you are copying to. This is the same header found on t!le tape you are copying from. Type OO4S is the. storage dump function that labels the tape file header on the tape you are writing. SEL T is the storage selection number. The SEL T for read/write storage is 0000. The SELT for APL ROS is 0004. The SEL T for BASIC ROS is OOOS. The tape receiving the dump must be marked properly. This procedure should be used to obtain a read/write storage dump when submitting an MTR (microcode trouble report), or if you cannot obtain a storage dump with the CMD 9 function. The data is written in the first unused file. The file type created is 72, which is the MTR file type. To dump all of the data in read/write storage to tape: 1. Insert a tape that is initialized and marked for a file large enough to contain the data (must be a minimum of 16K). The tape dump program looks for the first unused file of 16K or more. 2. Hold CMD and press HOLD. 3. Hold CMD and press/ -+ (divide) key on the numeric keyboard. 4. Displays DCP1 diagnostic mode when the operation is complete. Press RESTART to initialize the 5100 Portable Computer and continue. Tape Copy Procedure CAUTION You can use this procedure to copy individual files, except 8, 9, and 15, from the CE diagnostic cartridge. If files 8, 9, and 15 are copied, MDls 860 and 891 tests (average velocity and peak shift head azimuth) might be inaccurate. To copy individual files from storage to tape, use the following procedure: 1. The file to be copied from storage must have been previously loaded using the CMD 8 function; or it must already be in the storage locations you specify. Press and hold the CMD k~y. If you are already in DCP1 diagnostic mode, go to step 7. Press the -(minus) key. Press and hold the CMD key. Press the x or * (multiply) key. Press the C key. Press and hold the CMD key. Press the 9 key. Enter the starting read/write storage location, MEM@0800. Enter the ending read/write storage location, END@ FFFF. Enter the file number, FILE# xxxx (number in hex). Enter the file type (0011 if copying from another tape or 0048 if dumping from storage to a tape). T 0000. Enter the storage selection, SEL Press the EXECUTE key. 2. 3. To copy an entire tape, use the tape copy program on the customer support cartridge. The tape copy program is called via the PATCH program using )PATCH (APL) or PATCH (BASIC). . To repair individual files on a CE diagnostic tape, use the following procedures: 1. Use the C CMD 8 function to store the desired file in read/write storage at location 0800. Insert the tape cartridge to be repaired. Enter C CMD 9. Enter the beginning storage location (0800) and the end storage location (FFFF). Note: Error E80 010 is a normal ending error. 12. 5. Enter the tape file number in hex that was loaded from the good tape (0001 -001 F), and the file type number (0011 J. Enter the storage selection (0000). Press EXECUTE. The sequence of C CM D 8 and C CMD 9 can be repeated for each of the files on the CE diagnostic cartridge. Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing ATTN. Exit from DCP1 diagnostic mode, after copying the tape, by pressing RESTART. Insert the repaired tape cartridge and verify that it is fixed. 13. ( 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2. 3. It 4. 11. 6. 14. 15. 7. ( 8. 9. ( 10. The file that was in the storage positions specified in steps 10 and 11 has now been loaded on the tape in the file number specified in step 12. This procedure, in conjunction with CMD 8 function, allows you to load files into storage from one tape and then dump them onto another tape. It is also useful in checking suspected files that may contain CRe errors. By loading the file into storage (using CMD 8), the CRC and data is verified for parity. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-27 To tape errors while using the customer support cartridge that is prior to ECS32655, use this patch to halt the machine and display the status while running the tape copy functions: 1. Load the customer support cartridge. 2. Begin the tape copy. 3. Press the HOLD key. 4. When the machine halts, alter OFOA to 0000. 5. Hold the CMD key down and press the + (plus) key to continue to tape copy. 6. When an error occurs, the system will hang. 7. Display 2542-Look for current device address (E20, E40, or ESO). S. Display 254E-Error code (return code internal format). 9. Display 255E-Error code (return code internal format). For example: Error code 1 B1 D = tape cmd error 002. Refer to the Tape IOCB and the 5100 Internal Code Chart in section 6 of this manual. TAPE RESIDENT PROGRAMS This third group of diagnostic programs in the IBM 5100 Portable Computer maintenance package is for diagnosing I/O problems other than reading failures by the tape unit. If the bring up program finished without error and the DCP1 tape read program also ran correctly, the problem on the 5100 is probably an I/O problem. Of course, the I/O might not be at fault if the problem is intermittent. If an intermittent failure is suspected, DCP1 can be used to loop on the bring up program or to rerun the tape read program. 3·28 There are three ways to determine intermittent I/O failures in the maintenance procedure. 1. From MAP 200. 2. From MAP 900. 3. Directly (in this case, you must be familiar with. the 5100 Portable Computer maintenance package and be confident that the 5100 has an I/O problem). In any case, the part of the 5100 Portable Computer causing the failure can be found by following the procedures in DCP2 along with the instructions on the display. DCP2 (the first file on the CE diagnostic t cartridge) is loaded automatically into read/write storage at the completion of the tape read program. The various MAPs and diagnostics integrated (M DI) (the remaining files on the CE diagnostic cartridge, part 160S705) are loaded into read/write storage by the CE using DCP2. Diagnostic Control Program 2 (DCP2) DCP2 controls the loading and execution of tape resident programs. Loading DCP2 To load DCP2, first enter the DCP1 diagnostic mode by doing the following steps: 1. Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key. 2. Hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key on the numeric keyboard. 3. Hold the CMD key and press the * or x key on the numeric keyboard. The words DIAG DCP1 are displayed on line 1 at this point. 4. Press the C key. 5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the numeric keyboard. Note: See the CMD 0 routine in DCPl Diagnostic Mode in this section. 6. Press EXECUTE. 7. Follow the instructions on the display. ( After completing the tape read program, the first file of the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded into read/write storage and the following information is displayed: DCP2 MENU 800 PRINTER MDI 820 COMMUNICATIONS/SERIAL I/O MDI 840 AUXILIARY TAPE MDI 860 TAPE WRITE MDI ( 890 DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINE CHART ENTER THE MDI NUMBER §fATUS: ENTER ENTER '0' IF REPLY THE OPTIONS TO BE ARE RUN TO BE DISPLAYED XXX XXX is tne current EC number of this CE diagnostic cartridge. The leftmost dash before the words ENTER THE MOl NUMBER TO BE RUN flashes to indicate the position of the next character to be entered from the keyboard. The procedure for entering the MOl number is found under MOl in this section. ( MOl (MAPs and Diagnostics Integrated) MOl is MAPs and diagnostic programs integrated into a single maintenance approach. MOl, with the display and the keyboard, allows you to isolate machine failures by responding to information on the display screen. Questions on the display require a response via the keyboard. The MOl goes to the next question or section based on the keyboard input. Loading MOl Sections To load MOl sections, select the section from the OCP2 menu, enter the section number, and press EXECUTE. An 0 {letter) can be entered along with the MOl sections number (but on the next line) to select a special option or to alter a previously selected special option. Then, pressing EXECUTE displays the MOl options. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-29 It is possible to enter and run MOl numbers not appearing on the menu because the listed MOl sections are subdivided into sections each having its own number. These MOl sections are discussed in greater detail later. Subsections are used with some of the options mentioned in the previous paragraph. CAUTION Entering these numbers directly runs the MOl out of its normal sequence and. therefore. might give false results. You should be familiar with the MOl options before using this technique. After you select the MOl number from the menu and press EXECUTE. the 5100 Portable Computer automatically loads the MOl from the CE diagnostic cartridge and begins running it. As the MOl runs. the steps of MOl appear on the display screen. The MOl either runs to completion with no errors detected and with no intervention required. or it stops to allow action. In this case. read the display to determine the appropriate action. which includes the following: Replace FRUs Make an adjustment Probe a logical level Meter voltages Exchange FRUs Make an observation If a question is asked. answer it before pressing EXECUTE to continue. The format of the display with several examples follows. 3-30 ( / DCP2 Menu MDI (MAP Diagnostic Integration) ( Loading: 1. Select the MDI section number from the DCP2 menu. 2. Enter the MDI section number. 3. Press the EXECUTE key. This procedure loads and automatically runs the MDI. To stop the MDI and return to the MDI options, press the ATTN key. The following message might appear if the MDI halts: ENTER Y OR N (B, 0, T) Y Refers to an answer to a specific question on the display N = Yes} = No screen. Enter the appropriate answer and press the EXECUTE key. B = Back: You can enter B or BXX and press the EXECUTE key. XX is the number of steps you want to back up in the trace table. 0= Option: You can enter 0 and press the EXECUTE key to display the MDI options. T = Trace: You can enter T and press the EXECUTE key to display the s~eps that were executed along with the decision (Y or N) that was displayed. To obtain a c~py of the trace table, press the key, press and hold the CMD key, and press the; key. I I I MDI ran OK. Intervention required. Read RESTART ( "--Return to MAP the display and take the or appropriate action. press ATTN key twice and select the next MDI: 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·31 DCP2 I MOl Options Loading: 1. Select the MOl section from the DCP2 menu. 2. Enter the MOl section number: 3. Press the # key. 4. Enter the letter 0 (option). 5. Press the EXECUTE key. The MOl option table is now on the display screen. Note: The II key will tab to the next entry instruction. MODE: STEP Halts at each step and waits until the EXECUTE key is pressed to continue. You can change the decision of a step by keying in Y, N, B, 0, or T. RUN (default selection) Runs MOl automatically and halts when a question must be answered. NEXT STEP NO: Enter the next step number to be executed. (If you are using the loop on path option, you must enter the stop number here.) LOOP ON: STEP Allows looping on a specified next step number. PATH Allows looping on a path specified by the path start number and path stop number. The last step in the trace must be answered yes. MOl Allows looping a complete MOl section in step and run mode. UNTI L:(Use with loop on option) Blank Loops until the CMD and AnN keys are pressed (used with loop on step). YES Loops until a yes decision is obtained (used with loop on step). NO Loops unti.1 a no decision DIFFERENT Loops until a decision different from the decision established - . is obtained (used with loop on step). by the trace is obtained (used with loop on path or MOl). PATH START NO: Defines the path start num,ber when loop on path is selected. PATH STOP NO: Defines the path stop number when loop on path is selected. 3-32 I ' MDI Display Format (- 1 MOllO STEP NO I 2 XXXX 3 COMMAND TEXT AREA 4 QUESTION TEXT AREA 5 FIX TEXT AREA 6 7 SUPPLEMENTARY TEXT AREA 8 9 10 11 12 13 TEST -BITS ON 14 MASK - 0300 INSTRUCTION AREA 15 RCVO - 0700 REPLY AREA NEXT STEP NO. - 037 16 STATUS AREA "- I Line t The name of the MOl and the step number that is currently running. Lines 2-13 Contains the left 32 positions of the command text from the MAP. The right 32 positions display the supplementary text. Lines 14, 15, 16 Instructions, replies, and status. The instructions are usually to press EXECUTE after entering the reply (Y, N, B, 0, or T). Y means yes, N means no. The meaning of B-back, Q·option, T-trace is explained later under MDI Display Replies in this section. Supplementary Text Area Line 2 The MOl section number (described under Diagnostic Run Summary Chart in this section). Lines 12, 13, 14, 15 The bottom right of the display screen shows the data used to make the decision. TEST defines the type of comparison used for the decision. The comparison is made between the data defined by MASK and RCVO. MASK is used to refer to either expected data or a mask for bit comparisons. RCVO refers to the data that is returned from the section and can be data, status, or timing information. MASK and RCVO refer to data strings between 1 and 24 characters. The three classes of test are: 1. Bit comparisons (bits on, bits off, bits not on, bits not off) compare the RCVO data against the bits that are on in the mask. Zero bits in the mask are don't care bits. 2. Magnitude comparisons (low, high, equal, not equal, less than or equal, greater than or equal) compare the RCVO data against the mask. 3. Within limits compares that the RCVO data is with- in the upper and lower limits specified by the mask. A yes or no decision is made based on these results. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-33 MOl Message Displays The following message is displayed when a section was run in step mode, the results of the section were tested, and a decision was made by the program based on the results. (In this case, the decision is yes.) You can override this decision by entering an N or can also select one of the other options specified. When you press EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds accordingly. 1 IT[ST- DECISION IS (Y,N,B,Q,T) IMASK- BITS 0300 ON Y I RCVIt-· §T~TUS: ENTER REPLY INEXT STEP 0700 NO.-037 The following message is displayed when you must manually answer the MOl question. You can answer yes or no or select one of the other specified options. When you press EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds accordingly. ENTER Y OR N (B,O,T) §j~TUS: ENTER REPLY The following message is displayed when a remove, replace, or adjust action (RRA) is required to correct the failing FRU or when a no trouble found (NTF) step is reached. The reply defaults to an 0, but one of the other options can be selected. When you press EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds accordingly. o ENTER B, 0, Ol~ T §T~TUS: ENTER REPLY 3-34 ( The following message is displayed when set up command text is specified with an MOl test, when additional displays of command text are required, when a GOTO STEP or GOTO MAP is specified, or when a trace is displayed. Pressing EXECUTE continues; however, if one of the op- tions is entered before pressing EXECUTE, that option is taken. MOl Display Replies' T = Trace -Displays the trace of the steps that were execu- ted and the decision, yes (V) no (N), associated with each step. (A go to step is designated by a G, where the G means go to a step within the same MOl.) The trace is erased whe~ an MOl subsection is called. For example, MOl 800 has an MOl section 801. The MOl sub- section is called automatically as MOl 800 is executed. But, as you step through the MOl 800, you can see the PRESS EXECUTE(B,O.T) TO CONTINU~ §T~TUS: ENTER REPLY The following message is displayed when additional dis- plays are needed to show the entire trace table (256 steps maximum). The reply defaults to a T, but one of the other specified options can be selected. When you press EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds accordingly. ENTER T(D,D) TO CONTINUE TRACE T §f~TUS: ENTER REPLY The following message is displayed when a test is running. You are instructed to probe pins or .observe an opera- tion. The diagnostic test runs until ATTN is pressed, then the MDI question message appears. PRESS -ATTN-TO REPLY ~:;l (:, TUS: I~UNN I Nei (~/ (/ message on the display that the MOl subsection will be called if you press EXECUTE. That is the last time you can call the trace for MAP 800 before it is erased. While in trace mode, 80 steps can be displayed on one dis- play screen at a time. If the trace contains more than 80 steps it is displayed on multiple display screens and EXECUTE must be pressed to page through multiple displays. B = Back -Backs up one step in the MOl. A decimal num- ber between 2 and 99 can be entered following the B to back up more than one step at a time. Execution begins at the step number you specified. If the number entered is greater than the number of steps executed, the first step in the trace is selected. .you cannot back out of an MOl program. If you are in an MOl subsection, then you must return to the OCP2'menu to return the previous MOL The previous MOl is called from the OCP2 menu by entering the MOl number and pressing EXECUTE. o = Option -Returns to the MOl options display so you can enter new options. Pressing ATTN returns the OCP2 menu. Returning Control While the MOl is running, pressing the ATTN key returns the MOl option display. Pressing the ATTN key a second time returns the OCP2 menu and pressing the ATTN key a third time returns the OCP1 diagnostic mode. 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-35 MDIOptions The options are aCcessed through the MOl options display by pressing EXECUTE. The instructions on how to call the MOl options are provided on the display. The exception to this is if you are in an MOl section that does not have the MOl ~ptions as one of the display replies. In that case, press ATTN, or hold CMO and press ATTN, to get to the MOl options display. An illustration of the MOl options display is shown below. CAUTION If you are using the MOl options on MOl 840 or 844, remove the CE diagnostic cartridge and do not insert it until instructed to do so on the display. The tape might , J I be erased if inserted too soon. MDI OPTIONS MODE::: 1-51'['j:L RUN I NEXT STEP NO. :::. __ .... _ I-RUN -I LOOP ON -I . I-STEP-I 1-UNTIL -I PATH START NO,·=_ ......... . I-PATH-I I-YES-------I 1- I-MDI -I I-NO I-DIFFERENT-I -I PATH STOP NO, = __ . __ PRESS PRESS -(CMD)ATTN-TO STOP LOOPING PRESS -ATTN- -EXECUTE- TO RETURN TO CONTINUE TO DCP2 WITH THIS MDI STATUS: ENTER REPLY Mode: Defaults to run if step is not entered. Loop On: Loop on options are intended to diagnose inter· mittent problems. (Pressing HOLD while looping might STEP -Displays the results of each test and waits until cause a PROCESS CHECK.) EXECUTE is pressed before continuing to the next test. It is used to step through each step in the MOL You can STEP -Loops on the step specified by NEXT STEP NO. alter each decision in step mode. The MOl remains in until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the step mode until manually changed to run mode. selected termination options of the until function is met. RUN -Proceeds automatically through the MOl per- forming the designated test and displaying the results. PATH -Loops on the path specified by the PATH "The run function stops and waits for EXECUTE to be START NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIF- pressed only when a question must be answered by the FERENT option is selected. CE or when a fix is displayed. MOl -Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT Next Step No.: Selects the MOl step number to be executed option is selected. next. You have the option of selecting any step within the MOl (001-nnn). If an invalid step number is entered, an error message is displayed. 3-36 Until: Looping termination options. Blank, YES, and NO should be used with loop on STEP. DIFFERENT should ( be used with loop on PATH or loop on MOL These options are recognized only when one of the loop on options is selected. Blank (option field left blank) -Loops until CMD and ATTN are pressed, then returns the MOl options to the display screen. YES -Loops until a yes decision for a diagnostic test is obtained, at which time the screen describing the current MOl step is displayed, or until CMD and ATTN are pressed giving the same results as blank. ( NO -Same as YES except loops until obtaining a no d~cision for a diagnostic test. DIFFERENT -First a trace must be defined by pro- ceeding through the desired sequence of steps in the MOl or path. Then the program loops on the predeter- mined sequence of steps until the current sequence, varies from the predetermined sequence. When the loop terminates, the last valid step of the sequence is dis- played along with the decision that varied. Question steps are assumed to have the same response each time through the loop as they had when the initial trace was defined; therefore, they do not have to be answered each time. Path Start No: Defines the beginning step of the path. Path Stop No: Defines the ending step of the path. ( Stepping and Looping Step Through MOl MODE = STEP STEP -Displays the results of each test and waits until EXECUTE is pressed before continuing to the next test. It is used to step through each step in the MOl. The CE can alter each decision in step mode. The MOl remains in step mode until manually changed to run mode. NEXT STEP NO. = XXX Loop On Step MODE = STEP STEP -Loops on the step specified by NEXT STEP NO. until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the selec- ted termination options of the until function is met. NEXT STEP NO. = XXXX LOOP ON-STEP UNTIL-blank, YES, NO, DIFFERENT 5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-37 Loop On Path PATH -Loops on the path specified by the PATH START NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIFFERENT option is selected. Answer the questions exactly as they were answered on the initial pass through the path. No intervention is required for the program to loop con- tinuously. Howevet, a trace of the desired sequence of steps must first be created by proceeding through the path before the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The DIFFERENT option uses the trace table as a guide. To use the loop on PATH until DIFFERENT option: 1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed, enter the selected MOl number along with 0 for options, and press EXECUTE. This initializes the trace. 2. Enter STEP mode, then enter the path starting step number into NEXT STEP NO. 3. Press EXECUTE. This begins execution of the step selected by NEXT STEP NO. 4. Proceed through the path steps answering those steps that require intervention until you reach the desirecl path stopping step. This builds the trace of the steps in the path. The last step must be answered yes. 5. Press ATTN to return to the MOl options. 6. Enter: RUN mode NEXT STEP NO. (use PATH STOP NO.) loop on PATH until DIFFERENT PATH START NO. PATH STOP NO. 7. Press EXECUTE to begin looping. 8. Press (CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to the MOl OptiONS display where new options can be selected. To resume looping, press EXECUTE with- out changing the options. 9. Looping stops if the sequence of step execution deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed step is displayed along with the decision that varied. The looping options are cleared automatically so that pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error that occured. 3-38 Loop On MOl MOl -Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT option is selected. Answer the questions exactly as they were answered on the initial pass through the MOL No intervention is required for the program to loop con- tinuously. However, a trace of the desired sequence of steps must first be created by proceeding through the MOl before the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The DIFFERENT option uses the trace table as a guide. To use the loop on MOl until DIFFERENT option: 1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed, enter the selected MOl number, and press EXECUTE. This initializes the trace and begins running the MOL 2. Proceed through the MOl answering the steps that require intervention until the last step in the MOl is reached. This builds the trace of the sequence of steps that were executed. The last step must be answered yes. 3. Press T and EXECUTE to display the trace table. Record the first and last steps from the trace table for the MOl being run. j 4. Press ATTN to return to the MOl options. 5. Enter: RUN ,mode, (do not change the NEXT STEP NO.) loop on MOl until DIFFERENT 6. Press EXECUTE to begin looping. 7. If looping does not start, repeat steps 2 through 6. 8. Press (CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to the MOl options where new options can be selected. To resume looping, press EXECUTE without chang- ing the options. 9. Looping stops if the sequence of step execution deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed step is displayed along with the decision that varied. The looping options are cieared automatically so that pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error that occurred. MOl Subsections 890 Diagnostic Sections The printer, auxiliary tape, and diagnostic sections MDls on the DCP2 menu, are subdivided into individually numbered subsections. These are especially useful with the MDI options previously described. In addition, they can be entered directly into the DCP2 menu. CAUTION Entering MDI subsection numbers directly into the DCP2 menu runs the MDI out of its normal sequence and can These diagnostic sections allow you to select individual MDI sections for diagnosing intermittent problems. The diagnostic sections are normally run automatically under control of the MDI supervisor when tape write, printer, auxiliary tape, and communications MDI function MAPs are executed. They can be run individually by using the diagnostic sections (890) and the following loading instructions. cause erroneous results. ( A list of the MDls and their subsections follows: 800 5103 Printer MDI Exercisor 801 Error Determination 802 Error Determination 803 Error Determination 804 Error Determination 805 Error Determination 820 Communications/Serial I/O MDI No MDI subsections 840 Auxiliary Tape MDI 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 860 Tape Write MDI 861 890 Diagnostic Sections 891 892 893 894 (~. Loading Instructions: Load Diagnostic DCP1 : 1. Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key. 2. Hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key on the numeric keyboard. 3. Hold the CMD key and press the * or x key on the numeric keyboard. The words DIAG DCP1 are displayed on line 1 now. 4. Press the C key. 5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the numeric keyboard. Note: See the CMD 0 routine in DCP1. 6. Press EXECUTE. 7. Follow the instructions on the display. 5100 Diagnostics Overview, 3-39 After the tape read programs are completed, the first file of the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded and the OCP2 menu is displayed. 8. Select 890 from the OCP2 menu. 9. Press EXECUTE. 10. MOl allows the selection of the subsection function (tape write, printer, auxiliary tape, or communications) to be exercised. Reply to the appropriate question and press EXECUTE. 11. The first step of each chart (MOls 891-894) displays the section number, a brief description, and the calling step number of each diagnostic section available. The calling step number is also listed with each diagnostic section description that follows later in this section. Record the step number listed for the specified diagnostic section, press 0 (option) and press EXECUTE to display the MOl options. 12. Enter STEP, the step number as recorded in number 11 above, and one of the loop on options. Press EXECUTE to begin. 13. The diagnostic section displays status and/or data as described under MOl Display Format. Expected data or status is usually all 0' s to force a Y decision for the MOl step. All N decisions should be overridden by the operator by keying in a Y or an 0 (option) to avoid running an unwanted diagnostic section. Keying in an 0 to override either a Y or an N allows immediate selection of another diagnostic section step or allows a looping option within the same chart. A Y decision goes to the first step of the chart to allow selection of another diagnostic section step number. Return to 11 above. 14. To stop, hold CMO and press ATTN. The MOl options are displayed. Option and step numbers can be selected if desired. Pressing ATTN again returns the OCP2 menu. 3-40 , ,-- / / Diagnostic Program Routines ( Routine numbers are displayed on the CRT during step mode and, in many cases, during normal run mode. You can use the routine numbers in two ways: 1. To locate (using MOl step mode) and loop on a step within a specific test. You can do this using the MOl procedures. 2. To locate a specific test via MOl 890. The following chart provides an explanation of the test and also shows the MOl 890 step number. Step numbers are also displayed while running MOl 890. ( ( (/ Diagnostic Program Routines 3-41 TAPE READ TEST AND AUXILIARY TAPE DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES These routines are used in MOls 840 through 847 and MOl 893. The routine numbers are the numbers used in MDls 840 through 847. All tests with error codes return 0000. Routine Number Description Error Code Meaning , 1 TR01 I. TR02 TR06 TR07 3-42 Select subdevice test. This test is run as the first test in 0901 Failure of the F reset MDls 840-847 and should be run in 893 before any other command. test. The first time this test is run it asks you to enter the subdevice address with minimal error checking. Therefore. because you enter the subdevice address. 840-847 and 893 can be run on any tape subdevice. 0903 Failure of the subdevice select command. 0906 Improper response of the subdevice. Loop write read (LWR) of data to the base I/O card only. 0909 Incorrect data read back. for tape read test. and LWR of data to the tape adapter card for auxiliary tape test. Returns to the MOl section the last error code that occurred 0954 Neither BOT nor EOT status when TR061 was run. This test is used only in the auxiliary is active. tape tests. not in tape read program. 0957 EOT status is not active. 0958 EOT status cannot be cleared. 0960 BOT status is not active. 0963 The load point hole (BOT status) cannot be found (refer to 229 for load point hole). 0966 BOT status cannot be cleared. Reads and compares file 1 on the diagnostic tape for correct 0994 Data read is not correct. data using the I/O supervisor. Error codes 0009 and 0010 are used to determine the end of 0001-0008 See error codes and halt file 1 and indicate correct operation. Tape read branches to 0011-0014 conditions in this section. OCP2 if the operation is correct. ' j Routine Number Description Error Code Meaning (~ ( r " ( ( ( TR08 Tests interrupts from the tape control card. 0907 TR10 Returns the last error code that occurred to the MOl section. 0982 This test is used only in the auxiliary tape tests, not in tape read program. 0983 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 TR39 Determines if the diagnostic mode line is active when it 0939 should not be active. If it is active, eight read clocks are generated by the tape control card, which, in turn, causes an interrupt from the base I/O (F2) card when one is not expected. TR40 Checks to determine if the tape clock line and write enable 0940 line become active and that the read clock line is not an open circuit. Every time the write enable line shifts, the read clock line should pulse and cause an interrupt from the base I/O (F2) card. TR43 Checks the diagnostic mode line by changing it between 0943 write and read operations. TR46 Tests the missing interrupts for wrap through read/write 0946 head. This tests the tape control card detector circuits. The select channel line is changed between channel 0 and channel 1 ten times and at least three interrupts must occur. Interrupts occurred incorrectly. Status Error -Beginning of tape status active once, but not active now. Read Data Error -No interrupt (read clock) detected. from either tape track. Read Data Error -No interrupt (read clock) detected from tape track 0 (format track). Read Data Error -No interrupt (read clock) detected from tape track 1 (data track). Read Data Error -No sync byte (hex E7) detected on tape track 0 (format track). Read Data Error -No sync byte (hex E7) detected on tape track 1 (data track). Read Dsta Error -No sync byte (hex E7) on either tape track. An interrupt occurred. No interrupts occurred. No interrupts occurred. Less than three interrupts. Diagnostic Program Routines 343 Routine Number TR47 Description E"or Code Meaning All 1's or O's read from tape control card. /-- Checks the read data line to determine if it will go both 0947 -active and inactive. The program generates 10 read clocks on the tape cOhtrol card and reads the data associated with th~se read clocks .. There must be at least one 0 bit and one t bit read for this test to pass. A stuck bit causes all1's or. all O's to be 'read. Moves tape forward for two seconds. 0970 "'-- TR051 1 BOT or EaT was found; use TR051 or TR052 routines to reposition the tape. "'--_/ TR052 1 TR06P, Moves tape backward for two seconds. Checks the beginning (BOT) and end (EOn of tape status 0954 indicators. The tape is moved past the single BOT holes and the double BOT/EaT holes. If the test fails, the tape stops immediately. 0957 0958 0960 0963 EaT status is not active. EaT status cannot be cleared. BOT status is not active. The load point hole (BOT status) cannot be found (refer to 229 for load point hole). / Neither BOT nor EaT status is active. ~~" '. 0966 CAUTION If an error occurs and the test is retried, the tape might 'go off the end of the reel. TR73 2 Tests the tape speed to determine if the motor speed is 0973 correct. The program rewinds the tape to the first set of double holes and counts the time. When the load point hold is found, the time is compared. Remove the tape cartridge from the tape unit and attach a jumper between tape control card pin U06 (-write enable) and pin U08 (gnd). Wraps data through the base I/O card and tape control card. 0995 BOT status cannot be cleared. -" , Tape speed not close to 40 inches per second. TR95 The data returned was incorrect. 0996 Indicates that TR95 ran and can be rerun by pressing EXECUTE. 'If a 970 error results from the EOT hole t?eing in front of the tape mirror, manually move the tape to reposition the EOT hole. 2Looping on this test can cause a process check. 3-44 (, ( Routine Number TR101 Description Determines if both tape tracks return interrupts and if the sync byte (hex E7) can be read from both tracks. Error Code 0982 Meaning Status Error -BOT status active once, but not active now. Read Data Error -No interrupt (read clock) detected from either tape track. Read Data Error -No 0983 0985 C~ 0986 0987 0988 0989 l( TR0312 Cartridge in place status (10) should not be present. 0912 TR0315 File protect status (02) should be present. 0915 TR0318 LED on status (04) should be present. 0918 TR0321 BOT status (01) should not be present; that is, sense bit (01) 0921 should be on. TR0324 EOT status (SO) should not be present. 0924 TR0327 Erase active (08) status should not be present. 0927 TR0330 Erase active (08) status for track 0 (format track) should be 0930 (. present. Note: This test leaves the erase coil on. (j interrupt (read clock) detected from tape track 0 (format track). Read Data Error -No interrupt (read clock) detected from tape track 1 (data track). Read Data Error -No sync byte (hex E7) detected on tape track 0 (format track). Read Data Error -No sync byte (hex E7) detected on tape track 1 (data track). Read Data Error -No sync byte (hex E7) on either tape track. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Bad sense bit found. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-45 Routine Number Description, Error Code Meaning TR0333 Erase activ~(08) status for track 1 (data track) should be 0933 Bad sense bit found. present. Note: This test leaves the erase coil on. 0936 Bad sense bit found. TR0336 Select magnet active status (20) should not be present. TR0337 Select magnet active status (20) for forward tape motion 0937 Bad sense bit found. should be present, Note: This test leaves the forward tape and select magnet active commands on. TR0338 Select magnet active status (20) for reverse tape motion 0939 Bad sense bit found. should be present. Note: This test leaves the reverse tape and select magnet active commands on. ,TR0348 Cartridge in place status (10) should be present. 0948 Bad sense bit found. TR0349 File protect status (02) should be present. 0949 Bad sense bit found. TR0350 EOT status (80) should not be present. 0950 Bad sense bit found. 3-46 /" '~/ t / TAPE WRITE ROUTINES (~ These routines are used in MOl 860. The routine numbers are the numbers used in MOl 860. XS in the chart mean any number. ( Routine Number BT01 Description Average Velocity Test -Positions the tape to the file containing 1's Expected Information Error Code Meaning The average speed is computed to two decimal points and returned as a xxxx XXXX Average Deviation f and then begins the bit timing Velocity Number analysis test. BT02 Acceleration Test -Checks the xxxx speed of the tape from stop to 1500 bits after the tape has reached 20 inches per second. Graph BT03 Deceleration Test -Checks the xxxx speed of the tape for the 1040 bits after the drop of the run line. This speed should be less than 20 inches per second. Graph ( 4-digit decimal number in inches per second. For example, a received number of 4006 is actually 40.06 inches per second. The average speed is taken from the average of 9,192 bit times. The deviation number is returned as the third and fourth bytes. The speed at bit 800 is computed to two decimal points and returned. as a 4-digit decimal number in inches per second. If the speed is not within the range of 38.1 to 41.9 inches per second for bits 800 to 1500, then that speed is returned. The speed of the 1500 bits is displayed in a graph. The speed in inches per second is the vertical axis and the 1500 bits are the horizontal axis. Each asterisk (*) on the graph represents the average speed of 36 bits on tape. The speed at bit 1040 is returned as a 4-digit decimal number computed to two decimal points in inches per second. A graph of the speed of the 1040 bits is displayed. The speed in inches per second is the vertical axis and the 1040 bits are the horizontal axis. Each asterisk (*) on the graph represents the average speed of 26 bits on tape. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-47 Routine Number Description BT06 Erase Data on Both Tracks Expected Information Error Code Meaning / ~ / XXXXXXXXXXXX (six 2-digit error codes) 00-14 The program returns six error codes of two digits each. The first four error codes are expected to be 00. If they are not 00, they are the system error codes, 02-14. Refer to Error Codes in this section. r---" ~ BT11 Peak Shift-Head Azimuth Test on > to > Track 0 using a prewritten pattern (4-digit decimal of O's and 1's from file 15 -This number computed to test searches to file 15, then reads two decimal places) the data on track 0 in 10 bit timing analysis mode. Speed differences between the odd and even bits should not exceed 10.0 microseconds. BT21 Acceleration Test for Customer > Media -This test goes to file 1 and does the acceleration test using BT02. 348 The first error code is from a search to file 30. The second error code is from a mark command to mark two files of two records each. The third error code is from another search to file 30 and a write header command to this file. The fourth error code is from a write and read of data to file 30. The fifth error code is from a read of the data on file 30 after it was erased during the read operation. This error code should be 09. This is the first error code expected to be other than 00. The sixth error code is from a search for file 30 after the format track is erased. This error code should be 04. The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 0 in microseconds (see BT34). The average speed is computed to two decimal points and returned as a 4-digit decimal number in inches per second. For example, a received number of 4006 is actually 40.06 inches per second. The average speed is taken from the average of 9,192 bit times. The deviation number is returned as the third and fourth bytes. '-- .. ' j / ". /' Routine Number Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning ( BT22 Sense Test XX BT23 Write Read Test -Writes and XXX ... XX (up to reads the data in the MASK field twelve 2-digit bytes) on the display onto tape. ( f BT30 Peak Shift Test on Track 1 - > to > Returns the track 1 data generated (4-digit decimal during routine BT48. BT48 runs number computed to now if it was not run previously. two decimal places) BT31 Symmetry Test on Track 1 - > to > Returns the track 1 data generated (4-digit decimal during routine BT47. BT47 runs number computed to now if it was not run previously. two decimal places) ( BT34 (See note) Return Oata to MOl for Test Spec Function -This test is not an MOl routine but a subroutine of BT47, BT48, BT30, and BT31. This test generates an even average number and puts it into the first 4 digits of the MASK. A high number is generated by adding the permissible difference to the low average number and putting this in the last 4 digits of the MASK. The program also :( generates an odd average number into the RCVO. Bits: T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Odd average = average of T1, T3, T5, etc (/ Even average = average of T2, T4, T6, etc Note: Not accessible from MOl (' Returns the sense byte from the tape unit. Returned data is the correct data if there is no error, or the first data to miscompare if there is an error. For example, if the data 012345 is the expected data, 012345 ... , for a total of 512 bytes is written onto tape, where 01 is one byte, 23 the next byte and 45 the next byte, then repeat. If the data on tape is ABCOEF, ABCOEF is returned as RCVO on the display so that all 512 bytes need not be displayed. The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 1 in microseconds (see BT34). The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 1 in microseconds (see BT34). All data is in decimal microseconds. For example, if the averages calculated are 33.00 (even average) and 34.05 (odd average) and the permissible difference is 3.0, the information displayed is: TEST -Within limits MASK -3300-3600 RCVO - 3405 Diagnostic Program Routines 3,49 Routine Number BT35' Description EOT Hardware Stop Test -This test is similar to TR061 in the auxiliary tape and tape read routines. The difference is that the time~outs are different to make sure that the EOT stop hard works. Expected Information Error Code Meaning No errors. /- ' ..... 0000 0954- 0966 See TR061 for explanation of possible error codes. No errors. "'-_/ I BT36 Test Bit Timing Hardware (no tape 0000 J cartridge inserted) -This rest ~- requires two jumpers to run and the tape cartridge must not be inserted attach jumpers on tape control card pin B08 to pin S05, and pin U06 to pin U08. The test writes data, therefore it erases the tape. The test determines if the bit timing hardware produces correctly timed interrupts. 0811 Not enough interrupts occurred. 0812 Inte~rupt J times are incorrect. BT37 Check System and Diagnostic Error XXXXXXXX(two The last two error codes that were Code -Error codes are generated 4-digit error codes) given are returned by this program as by the programs each time they an 8-digit number. are run. This test is used to clarify previous errors. No hardware is The first 4 digits are the last system exercised by this routine. error code (02-14, see Error Codes in this section). The last 4 digits are the last error codes from the tape write routines (0800-0960 as described in the error code column of this chart). BT47 Symmetry Test on Track 0 - > to > The data (see BT34) returned is the Searches to file 30 and writes (4-digit decimal even average and odd average bit zeros on both tracks. The test then number computed to times for track 0 in microseconds. reads the data on both tracks in bit two decimal places) timing analysis mode. The permissible difference in speed between the odd and even bits should not be more than 3.0 microseconds. , Looping on this test can cause a process check. 3-50 r---" ',- ./ / C Routine Number BT48 Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning The data returned is the even average and odd average bit time for track 0 in microseconds (see BT34). Peak Shift Test on Track 0 -This xxxx to XXXX (4-digit decimal test is similar to BT47 but writes an alternating pattern of O's and number computed to 1's. The permissible difference of two decimal places) the O's and 1's can be a maximum of 8 microseconds. C' BT51 Erase Coils Open Test f TR01 Select Subdevice Test -This test is used in MAP 891 (auxiliary tape). It is not used for MAP 860. This test must be run before 891 is run on auxiliary tape. This test must also be run if the operator ever If returns to the DCP2 menu during MAP 891. The first time this test is run it asks you to enter the subdevice address with minimal error checking; therefore, 891 can be run on any tape subdevice. (-- ( 0000 No errors. 0808 Status bit 5 is on after an F reset instruction. 0809 Status bit 5 is on after a hex F7 control instruction command (erase channel 0). 0810 Status bit 5 is on after a hex FB control instruction command (erase channel 0). Status bit 5 indicates LED and erase coils OK. 0000 No errors. 0901 F reset failure on a get microinstruction. The status was other than FF after an F reset instruction. 0903 Subdevice select failure. The expected status bit was not active. 0906 Improper response from the selected subdevice. The expected subdevice response status was not active. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-51 5103 PRINTER DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES These routines are used in MOts 800 through 805. The routine numbers are the numbers used in MDts 800 through 805. The expected information column in the chart contains the following types of information: SA= Status byte A SB= Status byte B Device Address Bits 4-7 Device Name Bits 8-15 Definition 5 Printer If Ry is even, status byte A 8 Print emitter latch 3 9 Print emitter latch 2 10 Print emitter latch 1 11 Wire check or not ready 12 Forms emitter B 13 Forms emitter A 14 Not end of forms 15 Left margin switch or not ready If Ry is odd, status byte 8 = B· Print motor latch B (0 9 = not B) Print motor latch A (0 not A) 10 Print emitter interrupt 11 Not ready interrupt 12 Forms motor latch B (0 = not B) 13 Forms motor latch A (0 = not A) 14 80 cps = 0, 120 cps = 1 15 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) or, 1.1 rns or 3.3 ms (80 cps) timer interrupt EC = Error code An error code is a 2-digit decimal number described under Error Codes in this section. PLFP = Print line failure position The print line failure position is a 4-digit decimal number between 0001 and 0132. TS = Test status Test status is either 00 or FF. 00 indicates a test failure and FF indicates a pass. 3-52 ( (" ( Routine Number Description PT03 Expected Information Error Code Meaning Returns status bytes A and B. Turns off (resets) forms motor XX XX latch A and forms motor latch B in SA SB the printer adapter card (B1A2). Turns on forms motor latch A. Turns on forms motor latch B. PT04 PT05 XX SA XX SB Returns status bytes A and B. XX SA SB Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B. XX PT06 PT07 PT08 Turns on forms motor latch A and forms motor latch B. Gets Status. XX SA XX SB XX SA XX SB Spaces forms in increments of XX XX 1/16 of a line. Sixteen increments SA SB are spaced (one line). Detects open forms predriver lines or an open forms stepper motor winding. Checks the 2.66 ms (120 cps) timer or the 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer in the printer adapter card. XX EC 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B. error code. PT09 XXXX 0240-0284 (120 cps) 0310-0341 (SO cps) Returns a four-digit number in the RCVD data location as the interval between timer pulses. A decimal is implied between the second and third digits. Returns a four-digit number in the RCVD data location as the interval between timer pulses. A decimal is implied between the second and third digits. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. Returns status bytes A and B. C PT10 Same as PT09 except checks the 1.1 ms timer. XXXX 0102-0114 PT11 PT12 PT13 Turns print motor latch A and print XX XX motor latch Bon. SA SB Turns the print motor latch Bon. Turns print motor latch A on. XX SA XX SB XX SA XX SB ( PT14 PT15 Turns off print motor latches A and XX XX B. SA SB Turns off the forms go and print go latches that disable the two printer motors. Same as PT15 except status is returned after 300 ms delay. XX SA XX SB ( PT15A XX SA XX SB Returns status bytes A and B. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-53 Routine Expected Number Description Information I PT16 Gets and saves status bytes A and XX XX B the first time it is called and SA SB returns that status on all subsequent calls. PT20 Prints four lines of alternating Hs XX XX XX and blanks. Terminates early if an SA SB EC error code occurs. PT21 Ripple Print with Underscore - XX· XX XX Prints one line of all characters SA SB EC without underscore and one line of all characters with underscore. Terminates early if an error occurs. PT23 Staggered Print Test -Prints Hs in XX XX XX an ever expanding pattern until 132 SA SB EC Hs are printed in a single line. Terminates early if an error occurs. PT26 Gets the last error code value. XX EC PT01V6 Spaces forms six lines and repeats XX XX XX this sequence six times (36 lines). SA SB EC PT01V15 Spaces forms 15 lines and repeats XX XX XX this sequence 6 times (90 lines). SA SB EC PT17V1 Drives the print head carrier to the XX XX right margin, then ramps. If an SA SB error occurs, the routine gets the XX XXXX status, issues a ramp command, EC PLFP and terminates. PT17V10 Same as PT17V1 except repeats XX XX 10 times. SA SB XX XXXX EC PLFP PT25V1 Left Margin Timing Test -Moves XX XX carrier to the .right 3.3 inches (83.8 SA SB mm), then ramps. Checks to XX XX determine if left margin drops EC TS between print emitters 1 and 2. Terminates the routine and causes TS (test status) to be 00 if an error occurs. 3-54 Error Code Meaning Returns saved status bytes A and B. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and Band aFI error code. 50-59 Returns an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns two status bytes and an error code. All other M Dis return only an error code. 50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B and an error code. All other MOls return only an error code. 50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B, error code, and print line position of the print head where the failure occurred. All other MDls return EC and PLFP. 50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and B, error code, and print line position of the print head where the failure occurred. All other MOls return EC and PLFP. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. ( "-... / ........../ ~ ... '", . / ' ;- ' . .... -/ Routine Number Description Expected Information Error Code Meaning (- PT25V5 Same as PT25V1 except repeats XX XX five times if there are no errors. SA SB XX XX EC TS ( PT25V10 Same as PT25V1 except repeats XX XX 10 times if there are no errors. SA SB XX XX EC TS COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER/SERIAL I/O ADAPTER PROGRAM AND DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES When the Communications Adapter/Serial I/O Adapter features are installed, the diagnostic program provides: • A test of all of the status and control circuitry on the expansion feature card. The test further isolates problems to either the 5100 Portable Computer or customer provided data set/communications facility. • A test of the long space interrupt and the timer interrupt of the Communications Adapter feature. The long space interrupt detects an end of transmission request form the remote facility. The timer interrupt controls the data sampling and data transmission rates. , r 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. 50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an error code, and test status. • A test of the timer interrupt of the Serial I/O Adapter feature. The timer interrupt controls the data sampling and data transmission rates. • A test for each of the interrupt sources, both for the ability to set the interrupt via the hardware and reset the interrupt via the microcode. • Data tests of various bit combinations that isolate problems between the 5100 Portable Computer and customer provided modem/communications facility using a manually attached wrap connector to further isolate problems to the defective FRU in the 5100. The diagnostic routines are used in MOl 820. The routine numbers shown in the following chart are used in MOl 820. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-55 Routine Returned Information Number Description Status Data (hex) Meaning Routines COMOO through COM25 test the communications Adapter feature. Neither the data set nor the wrap connector needs to be attached for routines CO MOO through COM05. CO MOO Resets the expansion feature card. COM01 Returns communications status. XX One byte of sense status. COM02 Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 Good test. mode. COM03 Tests 134.5 bps timer interrupt 96 0200 through Good test. rate. 02F2 Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred. COM04 Tests 300 bps timer interrupt rate. 96 0147 through Good test. 014E Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred.' COMOS Tests 1200 bps timer interrupt rate. 96 0381 through Good test. 0399 Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred. The communications wrap connector must be attached for routines COM06 through COM10. COM06 Tests for long space interrupt EF 1886 through Good test. when long space received with 1800 terminal ready set. 00 61A8 No interrupt occurred. COM07 Tests for inactive long space 00 Good test. interrupt when continuous mark received with terminal ready set. COM08 Tests for inactive long space 00 Good test. interrupt when short space received with terminal ready set. COM09 Tests that long space interrupt 87 Good test for communications reset command resets the interrupt adapter. level and long space interrupt status. 96 Good test for Expansion feature. 3-56 / / "'-- / Routine Returned Information (- Number Description Status COM10 Tests that the Expansion feature 86 reset command resets the interrupt level and long space interrupt status. 96 ( COM11 Tests that alternating bit patterns can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM12 Tests that all O's pattern can be ( transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM13 Tests that all 1's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. COM14 Tests for timer interrupt when start 97 bit received while in receive mode. COM15 Tests for inactive timer interrupt 00 when no start bit received while in receive mode. COM16 Tests that dropping out of receive 00 mode after a start bit is received prevents a timer interrupt. ij ,-<; ' " COM17 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt 00 when a short start bit is received while in receive mode with the start bit check enabled. COM18 Tests that a receive data bit can be 86 set and that the Expansion feature reset command resets it. 96 03 COM19 Tests that data set ready and clear E6 ( to send status bits can be set. F6 ( Data (hex) 10 bytes of AA 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes or E2 10 bytes of 00 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 10 bytes of FF 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 Meaning Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Good test. Good test. Good test. Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Bit cannot be set. Good test for communications adapter. Good test for Expansion feature. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-57 Data set must be attached for routines COM20 through COM25. These routines test the communications network. The status is displayed on the bottom line. COM20 through COM25 routines are used in MOl 894 only. Routine Number COM20 COM21 Description Transmits solid mark. Transmits solid space. Comments Causes line disconnect if either' the transmitting or receiving data set is strapped for a long space disconnect. COM22 COM23 COM24 COM25 Transmits 300 bps alternating bit pattern. Transmits 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern. Receives and analyzes 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern. Receives and analyzes 300 bps alternating bit pattern. Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with decimal numbers. Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with decimal numbers. Routine Number Description Returned Information Status Data (hex) Meaning Routines 51001 through 51015 test the Serial I/O Adapter feature. Neither the I/O device nor the wrap connector needs to be attached for routine 51001 through 51006 51001 51002 51003 Returns serial I/O adapter status. XX One byte of sense status. Good test. 21 CA through 21E8 2710 1681 through 169F 2710 DB 38 through OB56 2710 0009 2710 Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. Good test. No interrupt occurred. ." .. / Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 mode. Tests FFFF timer interrupt rate constant. Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 96 00 96 00 96 00 96 00 51004 Tests AAAA timer interrupt rate constant Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 51005 Tests 5555 timer interrupt rate constant. Data is the rate in tens of p.s. 51006 Tests 004F timer interrupt Data is the rate in tens of p.s. r' 3-58 ( ( (' Routine Number Description Returned Information Data (hex) Status Meaning The serial I/O adapter wrap connector must be attached for routines 51007 through 51014. 51007 51008 Tests that data set ready and clear F6 to send status bits can be set. Tests that alternating bit patterns can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests that all O's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests that all 1's pattern can be transmitted and wrapped back correctly. Tests for inactive timer interrupt 00 when no start bit received while in receive mode. Tests for timer interrupt when start 97 bit received while in receive mode. Tests that dropping out of receive mode after a start bit is received prevents a timer interrupt. 10 bytes of AA 10 bytes of E1 1 0 bytes of E2 10 bytes of 00 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 10 bytes of FF 10 bytes of E1 10 bytes of E2 Good test. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good Test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. Not timer interrupt. Interrupts too frequent. Good test. 51009 51010 51012 51011 51013 Good test. Good test. 00 t 51014 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt 00 when a short start bit is received while in receive mode with the start bit check enabled. Good test. The serial I/O adapter wrap connector should not be attached for routine 51015. Probe pin 8 on the serial I/O connector. 51015 Tests the '+receive line signal detector' signal line. The CE probe UP light should be on. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-59 Error Codes The CE diagnostic error codes are 800 through 999. Refer to Diagnostic Program Routitles in this section for the error codes and their meanings. The following list of error codes are hardware related only. The BASIC or APL language error codes are in the APL or BASIC reference manual. The display format for hardware error codes is ERROR xxx yu. and is displayed on line 15 of the display. The xxx represents the error code, y represents the failing device, and zz represents the subdevice address. 'The subdevice address allows the 5100 to distinguish ,between I/O devices using the same device address, as in the case of the internal and auxiliary tape units. The subdevice address can be one of many addresses depending on the number and type of subdevices attached. The subdevice addresses for the tape units are: Internal tape unit -80 Auxiliary tape unit - 40 / Customer Error Code Descriptions ( Device ( Tape :( '~ 'J .';" ,( (~~ f." Error Code Description Device Error Address Subdevice xx y Address zz 002 E 'Z2. Invalid command for device or invalid sequence for device - Incorrect device address or file number specified by the user. 003 E z:z. Status error -Incorrect status sensed. The most recent status byte is located at address hex 008F (refer to Status under Tape Adapter I/O Lines in Section 4). 004 E zz Time-out -Data cannot be found on tape, or a rewind operation exceeded three minutes. (Data might not be found if the tape is positioned where there is no data or if the tape unit failed.) A time-out occurs during the rewind operation if the tape unit fails to sense the load point hole. If the tape unit senses the larger BOT / EOT holes, the tape moves forward looking for the load point hole until the time-out occurs. 005 E zz Cartridge not inserted -With a cartridge inserted, status bit 3 is 0, but should be 1. 006 E 'Z2. File protect -The file protect arrow is pointed to SAFE for a write operation. Status bit 6 is sensed as a 1 but should be a (indicates tape can be written). 007 E zz Cyclic redundancy check error -The data track CRC is bad (refer to Error Checking in Section 4). Obtaining a correct CRC requires proper operation of a" read/write components in the tape unit. An excessively used tape can cause 007 errors. Tape life is several thousand head passes on a customer cartridge and approximately 500 head passes on a CE diagnostic cartridge. 008 E zz Records or files out of sequence -Format record sequence numbers or header file numbers are not read in the correct order (refer to Tape Writing and Formatting in Section 4). 009 E 'Z2. End of data -End of data (hex 42) was read from the record type byte of a data record when end of data was not expected. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 010 E zz End of file -A read or write operation was attempted beyond the last record on the file. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 011 E zz Specified file number cannot be found -A hex FF (end of marked tape) was read from the header record file type byte before the user specified file was found. The tape unit is not usually the cause of this error. 012 E 'Z2. Physical end of tape -EOT status bit a was sensed as a 1, which indicates an EOT hole was sensed. An incorrect number of files or an incorrect file size can cause this error. 013 E 'Z2. Tape unit not ready An incorrect device address was specified by the user for the tape unit or there was not status response from the tape unit. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-61 Device Error Error Code Device Address Subdevice y Address zz E 'ZZ Description ,/ xx Tape (continued) 5103 Printer 014 " Specified subdevice is not attached -An invalid subdevice was specified by the user or expected subdevice status was not sensed. Printer not attached -An incorrect device address was specified by the user for the printer, or returned status on bus in was hex FF. End of forms -'+End of forms' line is down. This is caused by a defective switch and associated circuits, a maladjusted switch, or /- "---~ 013 5 00 i 050 5 00 !, ~i' ~;' I 051 5 052 5 054 5 055 5 056 5 3-62 00 00 00 00 the absence of forms. Printer not ready -Printer voltages (+24 Vdc or 10.8 Vdc) out of tolerance or a wire check occurred with the print head at the left margin. Forms step time-out -A forms emitter pulse did not occur within approximately two seconds from the previous forms emitter pulse. This timing does not apply during the forms movement stopping sequence. 00 Wire check -Indicates that a print wire driver was on too long. If the print head is in the left margin and' -wire on' is down, a 051 error occurs. If the print head is not in the left margin and '-wire on' is down, a 054 error occurs. Undefined interrupt -'-Interrupt request 2' line is down but none of the three interrupt bits from the printer adapter are on: Print emitter interrupt Status byte B bit 2 Not ready Status byte B bit 3 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms(120 cps) timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (90 cps) timer interrupt Incorrect print emitter sequence -The current print emitter and previous print emitter are out of sequence. Print emitter sequence when printing: right is 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1 etc left is 3, 2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 3 etc /--~ "- j Device Error Code Error xx Device Address y 5 Subdevice Address zz 00 Description (" 5103 Printer 057 Missing print emitter pulses -A print emitter pulse was not found (continued) ( ( , Tape { 058 5 059 5 900 to E 999 00 00 xx during the specified time (150 ms -SO cps, 100 ms -120 cps). The print head stepper motor begins turning when it receives pulses from the printer adapter. Error checking begins when the print head stepper motor is up to speed. If a print emitter pulse does not occur during the 100 ms or 150 ms timing, a 057 error occurs. If a print emitter pulse does occur but is not the expected pulse, a 056 error occurs. Refer to Print Emitter Error Timing following these error codes. Failures that prevent the carrier from moving (broken belt) cause a 057 error. Light mechanical binds or print emitter failure usually cause a 056 error. Timer interrupt time-out -Defective 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer. Timer accuracy is checked by running the printer diagnostic program (MOl 800). Overspeed error -Five or six print emitters occurred during one print head stepper motor step. Normal number of print emitters is 2 to 4 per motor step. Diagnostic errors generated by diagnostic sections. Refer to Diagnostic Program Routines or MAP 300 for error definitions. Diagnostic Program Routines 3-63 SERIAL I/O ERROR CODES The display format for serial I/O error codes is: ERROR xxx yyy where xxx is the error code and yyy is the device address of the failing device. Device Error Codes Description Error Device Address 510 002 yyy An invalid command was sent to an I/O device. For example: • A REWIND (BASIC) or )REWIND (APL) command is issued to an I/O device. • An invalid device characteristic was specified to the command device. • The input buffer size was increased after the input device was opened. • An invalid parameter was specified when opening the command device or an I/O device. 003 yyy In modem mode, a data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be caused by: • The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard interface. • A defective cable. • The I/O device power is not on. • The I/O device is attached with the wrong cable. 3-64 / Device Error Error Codes Device Address Description ( SIO 003 yyy (continued) (continued) (- ( 004 yyy 010 yyy ( 013 yyy 014 yyy (/ In modem mode, request to send (RTS) from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 receive operation. In terminal mode, clear to send (CTS) from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be caused by: • The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard interface. • A defective cable. • The I/O device is attached with the wrong cable. • The I/O device power is not on. • The wrong mode (modem, ignore, terminal, or set) is specified. • Hardware malfunction. Hardware malfunction. The 5100 recognized an end-of-file condition. This condition can be caused by: · Entering CMD O. · In modem mode, data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 receive operation. · In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a 5100 receive operation. The Serial I/O Adapter feature hardware is not installed or it is defective. The Serial I/O Adapter program is not loaded in user storage. An invalid device address was specified. Diagnostic Program Routines_ 3-65 PRINT EMITTER ERROR TIMING (NOMINAL TIMINGS) I- 1 Print Emitter Emitter Sequence = 1, 3 -.fl 120 cps SO cps 0.S3 1.25 "ffiS "I- 2 I I n n n n ,-----!fl 3 1 0.S3 1.25 ms "I- I 0.S3 1.25 ms -I- I 0.S3 0.S3 1.25 1.25--1 '-"'--'ms I ms 2 3 ·1- I I I ~. One missing I I '-X lOne missing print emitter I I I i I I I I : print emitter = error 056 I I Error 056 I I I I 1 I occurs here ! , : I 71 j I I Emitter sequence = 1, 1 I I I I I I I I I I I Two missing print Two missing 1 print emitters !/"",! I 1 I I emitters = error 056 or 057 I I I I I X I X I I I I I I I I I I I I Error 056 timing ------1-"" I starts in this area 100 ms (120 cps) 150 ms (SO cps) If error 057 timing starts here.-------.... an error 057 occurs 100 ms or 150 ms later - -~ 100 ms (120 cps) because no print emitters 150 ms (SO cps) were present during this time. Three or more missing If error 057 timing starts here, print emitters = error 057 an error 056 occurs here ----------- because an out of sequence print emitter was sensed before 3.3 ms or 2.66 ms elapsed for error code 057. TAPE READ TEST ERROR CHART ( 4 - ( -:, ,1. ,{ ( ( Error Code 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 901 903 906 907 909 912 915 918 921 924 927 930 933 936 937 938 939 940 943 Meaning A TIN key pressed Incorrect command detected Machine error Timeout Cartridge in place errors File protect error Data error Sequence error End of data test End of file test End of mark test End of tape test Device not attached Device not selected Device reset error Card logic test error Subdevice address error Interrupt error Wrap test-no data Cartridge in place error File protect error LED/PTX test LED/PTX test LED/PTX test Erase mode test Erase mode test-channel 0 Erase mode test-channel 1 Select magnet test Forward select magnet status test Reverse select magnet status test Interrupt error Wrap test-no interrupt Wrap test-extra data Area Tested Keyboard F2, G2 F2, tape control card Read/write head Cartridge in place switch File protect switch Tape cartridge, read/write head Tape cartridge, read/write head Tape cartridge Tape cartridge Tape cartridge Tape cartridge F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2, tape control card F2 Cartridge in place switch File protect switch LED/PTX assembly LED/PTX assembly LED/PTX assembly F2, tape control card F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Select magnets F2, tape control card F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Tape control card Tape control card Diagnostic Program Routines 3-67 Error Code 946 947 948 949 950 951 Meaning Wrap test-read/write head Wrap test-no data Cartridge in place error File protect error End of tape test Tape motion test (forward) Area Tested Read/write head Tape control card Cartridge in place switch File protect switch Tape cartridge Tape motor assembly, forward select magnet /' ""~ "-- 952 953 954 . 957 958 960 963 966 970 973 982 983 985 986 987 988 989 994 995 996 3-68 Tape motion test (reverse) Tape motion test BOT and EOT test EOT test Tape speed test BOT test BOT test Tape speed test BOT and EOT test Tape speed test BOT test Read data error Read data error-channel 1 Read data error-channel 0 Sync byte test-channel 0 Sync byte test-channel 1 Sync byte test Read data error Wrap test-no error Wrap test OK Reverse select magnet Brake arm LED/PTX assembly lED/PTX assembly Cartridge stop blocks LED/PTX assembly Cartridge stop blocks Cartridge stop blocks F2, tape control card Cartridge stop blocks F2, tape control card Tape control card Read/write head Read/write head Read/write head Read/write head F2, tape control card F2, tape control card Tape control card None / , "~ / -'" Service Aids ERROR INDICATORS There are two error indicators on the 5100-the control panel PROCESS CHECK light and messages on the display. The PROCESS CHECK light is activated by parity errors detected in any of several functional units. (See Controller in Section 4.) When the PROCESS CHECK light is activated, the machine stops immediately with the error latched. This allows you to identify the type of error by means of the logic probe. Error messages are displayed only when enough of the 5100 internal functions are operating to ensure that the display message is accurate. Error messages appear whenever the customer programs sense an error condition or when the CE diagnostic programs are run and an error occurs. The errors that occur when the diagnostic programs run are coded to provide entry points to the MAPs. Halt codes are displayed when a failure occurs during the bring up program. When the bring up program is run, a sequence of letters (A through K) is displayed; each letter indicates the completion of a portion of the bring up program. If a failure occurs during bring up, the last letter of the sequence indicates the failure that occurred. This information is used in the MAPs to determine the cause of the failure. Moving the switch from the RUN position stops program processing upon completion of the E cycles of the current microinstruction. To see the effect of the run switch when the 5100 is processing, set the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch to the DISPLAY REGISTERS position. Register 0 of one of the program levels changes rapidly unless the 5100 is halted by a halt microinstruction. Moving the run switch from the RUN position stops register 0 and allows you to read the hex numbers on the display. The 5100 remains stopped until the run switch is returned to the RUN position or until the step switch is pressed. (./ ( Step Switch The step switch has no effect on the operation of the 5100 unless the run switch is moved from the RUN position. When the step switch is pressed, the 5100 executes one microinstruction and then stops. The step switch must be pressed and then released in order to execute each microinstruction. Pressing the step switch moves the number in register 0 of the current program level to the next microinstruction address as each microinstruction is processed. ( JUMPERS Machine Check Jumper CE Switches Two CE switches, run and step, are located inside the 5100 next to the display assembly. Removing the top cover allows access to these switches. The run switch is the two-position toggle switch and the step switch is the small momentary switch. This jumper connects pin G2-S07 to G2-S09 on the 5100 A 1 board. Removing this jumper allows the controller to continue functioning when an error occurs on the machine check line. Misleading results can be received by running with the jumper removed. Basic Language Jumper Run Switch The run switch controls the operational state of the 5100. To execute programs, the run switch must be in the RUN position. This is the processing state and the switch must be in this position when the 5100 is returned to the customer. This jumper connects pin F2-S04 to F2-UOB on the A1 board. The jumper ties the '+APL switch' line to ground. Display Jumper This jumper connects pin J2-G07 to J2-UOB. To use the jumper, see Note on page 2 of 551 in the Circuits section of this manual. Service Aids 3-69 -_.-- .. - -_. ---.- DISPLAY REGISTERS The remaining level 0 registers contain hex EEEE. To display the hex registers and read/write storage. size, ROL 1 = hex 2345 • the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch must be in the RFL 1 = hex FEDC II DISPLAY REGISTERS position. This displays the first 512 bytes or 256 halfwords of storage. The first 64 halfwords are the registers. The remaining level 1 registers contain hex DDDD. The 64 registers (halfwords) are divided into 4 levels (0, ROL2 = hex 9ABC .. 1, 2, and 3) of 16 registers each (0 through F). The MAPs refer to the registers and levels in an abbreviated The remaining level 2 registers contain hex CCCC. manner. For example, R1 L2 means register 1 level 2. ROL3 = hex BCBC II The position of the L3Z-64-R32 switch determines the RFL3 = hex FFFF II number of registers displayed. In the L32 position the 32 registers in levels 0 and 2 are displayed. Likewise, in The remaining level 3 registers contain hex BBBB. the R32 position the 32 registers in levels 1 and 3 are displayed. To display all 64 registers, move the switch Register to 64. level Use The following examples and the illustration show how to o Normal Machine Operation locate certain registers within the various levels. Use the Communication/Serial I/O Mode numbers in lines 5 and 6 to help locate the registers in 2 Printer and Tape each level. 3 Keyboard Note: These register bytes are displayed vertically. ROLO = hex 1234 II R1 LO = hex 5786 • R FLO = hex 0000 II RBL2 RAL2 7 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD Level 2 I~~C!I:"CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD A CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC C CCCCCCCC C BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB F Line 5 Line 6 00~~~~22333F5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF 0000 00~~2233445566778899AABBCCDDEEFFOO~~2233FF5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 OOOOOOOpOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO L32 R32 3-70 Read/Write Storage Size In this example, the read/write storage size = hex 3FFF Altering Storage Size To alter the storage size to a value less than the available storage size of the machine: 1. 2. Hold the CMD key down and press the HOLD key. Hold the CMD key down and press the -(minus) key. Press the A key. Enter OOAS B· The address of the last byte of installed read/write storage is stored in read/write storage halfword hex OOAS. Read/write storage size is measured each time the bring up program is run and is not valid at hex OOAS until checkpoint H is displayed. B ( ( The hexadecimal number read/write storage size indicates the amount of read/write storage installed. Read/write storage size = hex 3FFF-16K (K2, K4) Read/write storage size = hex 7FFF-32K (L2, L4) Read/write storage size = hex BFFF-48K (M2, M4) Read/write storage size = hex FFFF-64K (N2, N4) All other values for read/write storage size are invalid unless the PATCH program or serial I/O microprogram is loaded. 3. 4. 5. B. Enter the storage size you desire. The size ~nt~~r~rtF. must be smaller than the available storage size of the machine. Press the SPACE bar. Hold the CMD key down and press the * (multiply) key (for BASIC) or the x (multiply) key (for APL). Enter BE. Enter 1200 (for BASIC) or Sooo (for APL) and press EXECUTE. Display the registers. The storage size you entered will be in storage location OOA8 6. 7. S. 9. 10. D. 11. Read/Write Storage Addressing Press RESTART to return to the original storage size of the machine. 008F OOOO _____ {358EEEEEEEEE 0030 -DDDDDDDDDDDDDFD BBBBBBBBBBBBBFF 00401~~2~4~7~6~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~E~C~ 0080~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~F=F, 0100 c: 0140 0180--1-=======-=-=i1===.:..=,.;;r::.==~1=======-=-=i1=====-=-=-= 0198 OlBD Service Aids 3-71 PRINT PLOT FORMS MOVEMENT EXERCISER PROGRAM The print plot forms movement exerciser program is used to check the 5103 Printer for' forms movement problems. This program is contained on the print plot/BASIC or the print plot/ APL tape cartridge. The printout of the program follows: I I The program plots two sets of parallel horizontal lines. These lines are tolerance lines. The program then , ;1 alternately plots one dot at a time within each set of tolerance lines. If the forms movement is working correctly, the dots should be plotted within the tolerance lines. After plotting all of the dots, the program then plots the parallel vertical lines. If the forms movement is working correctly, these lines should be the same length as the distance between the top and bottom horizontal lines; the density of the vertical line should be consistent. Use the following procedure to run the print plot exerciser program: 1. If in BASIC mode, load the print plot/BASIC forms movement exerciser program. See Appendix A. Print Plot/BASIC Forms Movement Exerciser Program of the IBM 5100 Print Plot/BASIC User's Manual, SA21-9265. If in APL mode, load the print plot/ APL program. See Appendix A. Print Plot/ APL Forms Movement Exerciser Program of the IBM 5100 Print Plot/APL User's Manual, SA21-9264. The file name is PLOTDIAG. Watch the results on the 5103 Printer. If the dots are not within the tolerance lines or the vertical lines are not the correct length or density, use the Print Plot Error Chart in this section. 3-72 / Print Plot Error Chart START Use .MAP 810 No Yes No Run customer job using this chart No Yes Run print plot test using chart then run MOl 800 ( Yes Reru n test usi ng only amount of paper required Do forms emitter disk adjustment and emitter timing Print emitter pick- up, left margin, and hold down bracket adjustment check for binds Yes Remove tractor assernbly and rerun test Notes: Also verify: 1. Platen gear backlash 2. Forms feed stepper motor gear backlash Do the following adjustment: 1. Platen and paper deflector 2. Platen release eccentrics 3. Platen pressure rolls 4. Check a frame alignment 5. Print head adjustment 6. Print head ribbon shield No Verify all adjust- ments and use scope procedure on forms emitter Loop MOl 800 Service Aids 3-73 Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide This guide is a summary of the 5100 diagnostics and a guide for troubleshooting intermittent failures. 5100 DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY The 5100 diagnostics start testing a small area of the machine and gradually expand to test the complete system. Each diagnostic tests a specific area and overlap each other. For example, the ROS diagnostic tests ROS but, because ROS contains the printer microinstructions, some printer operations are indirectly tested. Normally the tests should be run in the sequence shown on the Diagnostic Summary Chart. However, in the case of intermittent failures, this sequence can be altered depending on: -The information you have concerning the failure. Whether or not this is the first call. -How frequently the failure occurs. There are three categories of diagnostics: • Exercisers • Failure isolation • Utilities' Exercisers The diagnostics that fall into the exerciser category are the bring up and ROS resident programs. These programs exercise the machine and halt when failures occur. Now you can use the MAPs to locate the failure or, if the failure is intermittent, use the Diagnostic Summary Chart on the facing page to assist you in isolating to the failing FRU. Failure Isolation The tape resident diagnostics provide failure isolation. These diagnostics are integrated into the MAPs and are called MDls. The MDls locate failing FRUs associated with the printer, the internal tape unit, the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit, and Communications/Serial I/O features. 3-74 Utilities Utilities are contained in the ROS resident diagnostics. They are used to display and alter read/write storage, to branch, to copy tape to read/write storage, and to copy read/write storage to tape. These diagnostics are not covered in this guide; refer to ROS Resident Programs and Tests in this section. DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART The Diagnostic Summary Chart shows the diagnostics, the areas tested, the operating instructions, and the normal sequence of use. The chart does not show all of the diagnostic capabilities, just those primarily used for failure isolation. When reviewing the chart, note how the diagnostics use the building block concept. That is, they begin by testing the basic machine functions and then proceed until they have tested the most sophisticated functions. The bring up diagnostic does not loop automatically; therefore, four of its tests are repeated as ROS resident diagnostics CMD 2, 3, 4, and 5. Looping on a MOl allows repetitive testing of a complete device. Failures during looping cause a branch to a subsection of the M DI that checks a smaller area of the device. You can loop on subsections of the MOl to further isolate the failure. However, it is important to start with one of the displayed OCP2 options because these tests are sequence sensitive. DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART (/ Tests Bus Bit In Op Code Test R/W Storage Interrupt 1, 2, 3 Device Address Bus Out Stuck Key Storage (0600 to end) ROS Content and CRC ROS Address Read Back Bring Up Complete ( Power On )I-------t.~ + -4-------1., ____ _ BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS Halt Indicator Blank A A B A B C A B C D A B C D E A B C D E F A B C D E F G A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H I A B C D E F G H I J A B C D E F G H I J K Area Tested G2, Power, Display F2 F2, G2 E2 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2,F2 E2, F2, J2 F2 F2, Keyboard K2 through N4 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 H2,H4 ( OR--------------------------------------------~ DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode I + Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode: - - - Hold CMD and press HOLD Hold CMD and press -(minus) Hold CMD * or X (multiply) APl/BASIC Normal machine operation To run CMD 0, 1,2, 3, 4, or 5: - - - Press C Hold CMD and press the appropriate test number (0, 1,2,3,4, or 5) Press EXECUTE Area Tested Tape Read Tape Read Op Code Loop ROS Read CRC Loop ROS Address Loop R/W Storage Internal tape unit without tape motion Internal tape unit with tape motion F2, G2 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 K2 through N4 Test CMD 0 - CMD 1 - CMD 2 - CMD 3 - CMD 4 - CMD 5 - I OR----------------------------------------------------------J DCP2 + Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Model as described above. Run CMD 0 or 1 as described above. Miscellaneous In structions: ( Press ATTN ( 1 time) = MDI Options DCP 2 is now loaded. Select MD1 from the menu via the 2 times) = DCP 2 Menu Press ATTN ( Press ATTN ( instructions on the display. 3 times) = DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode y I Instructions Loop On MD = Refer to Loop on I MDI 800 -Printer -Refer to MDI 800 in this section.J MDI in this section , L I MOl - ,Ir ~ l MDI -820, Communications and Serial I/O -Refer to MDI 820 in this section. I MDI -840, Auxiliary Tape Unit -Refer to MDI 840 in this section.J 860, Tape Write, Internal and Auxiliary -Refer to MOl 860 in this section. I Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-75 TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES • Have the customer record as much information as possible when the failure occurs. How to Use This Guide How often does the machine fail? Because this is a guide instead· of a MAP, you must Does the failure occur during one or many jobs or make. many decisions based on the information available programs? and the frequency of the failure. The OR circles on the Failure Isolation Chart in this section indicate that type Does the failure occur in BASIC, APL, or both? of situation. Does the failure occur at a particular time, such as when the machine is first powered up or after it is Recommendations on Failure Information warmed up? The following recommendations are given to assist you Is the system configuration always the same or are in obtaining failure information. Their order of other devices attached when the failure occurs? presentation has no significance. • Record any information on the previous items and • Determine the customer error code if possible. An record any fixes in the space provided. error code is normally more factual that the operator's failure description. The descriptions of the Notes customer error codes are in the BASIC Reference Manual, SA21-9217, Appendix B and in the APL Reference Manual, SA21-9212, Chapter 11. Refer to Error Codes in this section for error codes below 100. Use these error code descriptions to aid you in deciding which diagnostics or MDls torun. If the failure appears to be a printer or a tape problem, record the status byte information. See Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions or Tape Status ." ' ... / Byte Bit Descriptions under Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures in this section. This information will help you to isolate the failure and to determine which MOl to run. " , ,/ ' 3-76 ( Service Hints • Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by: Vibrating the machine/ cards/ connections. Raising the machine temperature (unplug the blower). CAUTION 00 not exceed 20 minutes. Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit coolant). • Machine power must be off when removing the read/write storage cards (K2 through N2). All other cards can be removed with power on. • You can remove the following cards/devices if they are not part of the failing operation or when trying to isolate to a failing operation: A2 - I/O Driver B2 -Communications and serial I/O APL cards C2, 02, 04, H4 if the failure is in BASIC BASIC card C4 if the failure is in APL Read/write storage cards above 16K 5103 Printer 1506 Auxiliary Tape Unit • You can swap either the parts of the tape units (internal and auxiliary) or the complete tape units (physically or electrically). To swap electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket of the 5100 A1 board (228) with the cable in socket B4 of the Auxiliary Tape Unit (580). The internal tape unit address is now E40 and the Auxiliary Tape Unit address is E80. • To loop CMO 0: Load and run CMO 0 until the first stop Insert diagnostic cartridge Hold CMO and press ATTN Press A Enter: 368C2B04 Press SPACE bar Press A Enter: 2B5831 BO Press SPACE bar Enter: BR2B04 Press EXECUTE Tape Status Byte Bit Description -Storage Address OOSF Bit O-End of Tape (EaT): Indicates that anyone of six holes in the tape (three at the beginning and three at the end) generated EOT status. Bit 1-No Device Address E Response: Indicates that status bit 1 was not active. Bit 2- Tape Running: Indicates that the forward or reverse select magnets were selected. Bit 3-Cartridge in Place: Indicates that the cartridge in place switch is active. Bit 4-Erase On: Indicates that either channel 1 or channel 0 erase current was on. Bit 5-LED and Erase OK: Indicates that the EOT and BOT LEOs were conducting and that the erase coils did not have an open circuit. Bit 6-File Protected: Indicates that the file protect switch was made. Bit 7-No Beginning of Tape (1 = No BOT): Indicates that none of the top five holes in the tape generated BOT status. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-77 J : Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions Status Byte A (RAL2) Bit O-Print Emitter Latch 3: Monitors the printer error conditions and times the print wire firing. Bit 1-Print Emitter Latch 2: Monitors the printe~ error condition and times the print wire firing. Bit 2-Print Emitter Latch 1: Monitors the printer error condition and times the print wire firing. Bit 3 - Wire Check or Not Ready: Signals the adapter that a print wire magnet was energized for more than 1.6 ms when printing or 3.0 ms when not printing. Bit 4-Forms Emitter B: Determines when to stop. Bit 5-Forms Emitter A: Forms movement. Bit 6-Not End of Forms: Indicates the presence of forms. This signal is active when forms are within two inches (50.8 mm) of the print line. Bit 7 - Left Margin: Used as a reference to position the print head. Status Byte B (RBL2) Bit O-Print Motor Latch B (0 = not B): Provides controls for the print head stepper motor. Bit 1-Print Motor Latch A (0 = not A): Provides controls for the print head stepper motor. Bit 2-Print Emitter Interrupt: Gen~rates an 'interrupt request 2' when print emitters are activated by the microprogram. 3-78 Bit 3 - Not Ready Interrupt: Is caUl~ed by the printer adapter sensing a not ready condition from the printer. Bit 4-Forms Motor Latch B (0 = not B): Provides controls for the forms feed stepper motor. Bit 5-Forms Motor Latch A (0 = not A): Provides controls for the forms feed stepper motor. Bit 6-Forms Control Interrupt: Generates an 'interrupt request 2' by changing conditions from the forms control emitter. Bit 7- Timer Interrupt: Indicates that the timer interrupt controls the speed of the print head stepper motor. ! Failure Isolation Chart Start For intermittent process checks, refer to page 4-14 Review the Customer E"or Code Descriptions in BASIC reference N manual, Appendix B, and >...;.;.-----!APL reference manual, Chapter 11 to help you determine the possibility of an operator error. Review the Customer Error Code Descriptions in this section to help you determine which I/O device to test. If in doubt. test all devices. Review problem with the operator Run DCP " CMD2.3.4.5 Use the Bring Up Diagnostic chart in this ------------------------------------, Start MAP 200 300 400 420 500 510 600 700 810 830 850 900 section to aid you in card swapping - - - - - - - - - - - Tape read Bring up Process check Note: MAP organization always starts with MAP 200. Display TV monitor Keyboard Po",",r Printer Communication, SIO Auxiliary tape Machine check out ----------1 r------ ' -----, I MOl 890 in this section. I I I .... ---------- ..... I I MOl 890. Refer to : I ~------------_4--------------~------~------~------------_4----------------~---------J (: Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-79 Language Support Troubleshooting Guide 5100 Termination Problem Process check and/or halts might be caused by a BASIC Diagnostic Tools defective printer adapter card in the 5103 printer. • List Print -Prints the user program (if a printer is attached). Run Trace, Print -Produces a printed trace of the steps as they are executed. 5100 5106. • Pause -A pause statement inserted in a program which allows you to stop execution of the program in order to look at variables. 5103 or Terminator • Run Step -Allows you to step through a customer ; ;' program. When a total system is connected, the termination is APL Diagnostic Tools done by the printer adapter card in the 5103 printer. • )FNS -Lists names of user defined functions. When only the auxiliary drive (5106) is connected, the termination is done by the terminator assembly attached • )VARS -Lists the variables. to the rear of the 5106. Be sure the terminator is mounted in the I/O connector and not in the storage • V (user defined function name) [0] - Lists the location. function. • T 6 (user defined function name) + (step numbers CRT Centering Problem separated by a space) -Results in a trace of the specified steps. If you are not able to center the CRT after installing a new J2 card on an old level machine, check the tub file • T6 (user defined function name) +10 -Results in a for subcards and FBM5572571 for the 64K machines. trace of the first 10 steps. If the B/M 5572571 is not installed, order it from Mechanicsburg. • T6 (user defined function name) +60 -Turns trace off. • 56 (user defined function name) + 3 5 -Results in a stop before statement 3 and before statement 5. You may also do the following to help debug a program: • Insert statements • Change statements • Delete statements • Insert print statements to print variables • Break complex statement into several shorter statements ./ 3-80 c: ( Bring Up Diagnostic If the diagnostic fails often enough to use the MAPs, go to MAP 200. Try to make the machine fail in order to answer the MAP questions. Also review the MAP paths to aid you in determining which part to swap. If the diagnostic seldom fails, use the following chart to help determine which part to swap. BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS Tests Halt Indicator Blank A A B ABC ABC D ABC D E ABC D E F ABC D E F G ABC D E F G H ABC D E F G H I A B C D E F G H I J ABC D E F G H I J K Area Tested G2, Power, Display F2 F2, G2 E2 C2,C4,D2,D4, E2,F2 E2, F2,J2 F2 F2, Keyboard K2 through N4 C2,C4,D2,D4,E2 E2 H2,H4 f Bus Bit In Op Code Test R/W Storage Interrupt 1, 2, 3 Device Address Bus Out Stuck Key Storage (0600 to end) ROS Content 1 and CRC ROS Address Read Back Bring Up Complete 1 The sequence number displayed during this test identifies the card tested. Sequence Number 10,11,12,13,14,15 16,17,18 20,21,22,23,24 25,26,27,28,29 2A,2B,2C,2D,2E,2F ROS Card C4 (BASIC ROS) E2 (ROS Adapter) D2 (APL ROS 1) D4 (APL ROS 2) C2 (APL ROS 3) ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-81 Intermittent Process Check Use the following procedure to help you find the cause of intermittent process checks: 1. Before resetting the PROCESS CHECK light, refer to Error Checking in Section 4 of this manual. This provides a list of lines you may probe to help isolate the process check error to a card or a device. Use the following probe points and card references, along with the 5100 logic diagrams and MAPs to isolate the process check error: • Rd data error (-G2-S08) -This is a parity error on data in the read data register of the controller. Cards that can cause this error are: the controller (G2) card; the display (J2) card; the BASIC, I/O, and diagnostic (H2) cards: the read/write storage (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, and N4) cards; and the APL supervisor (H4) card. A parity error, resulting in an Rd data error, occurs if there is an attempt to read from a read/write storage address for which the read/write storage cards are not installed. This means that if less than 64K of read/write storage is installed, an error in the microprogram can cause a process check. • Bus in error (+G2-U09) -This error is a parity check on bus in. Cards that can cause this error are the controller (G2) card; the base I/O (F2) card; the ROS adapter (E2) card; the expansion feature (B2) card; and the I/O cable driver (A2) card. In addition, this error can be caused by the following I/O devices: keyboard, tape unit, printer, or Auxiliary Tape Unit. To determine the device address, probe the following address line points and refer to the following chart: XO F2-007 X1 F2-B07 X2 F2-009 X3 F2-002 YO F2-B09 Y1 F2-01O Y2 F2-B10 Y3 F2-011 Note: An active line will have a + voltage level. 3-82 Device Address Address Lines Device Name o XOYO Controller G2 XOY1 Nonexecutable ROS (BASIC C4 and APL ROS C2, 02, 04) 2 XOY2 Not assigned 3 XOY3 Not assigned 4 X1YO Keyboard and the APL-BASIC switch 5 X1Y1 Printer 6 X1Y2 Not assigned 7 X1Y3 Not assigned r 8 X2YO Expansion feature 9 X2Y1 Not assigned 10 X2Y2 Not assigned 11 X2Y3 Not assigned 12 X3YO Not assigned 13 X3Y1 Not assigned 14 X3Y2 Tape units 15 X3Y3 All I/O • +Address check (F2-B13) -This is a device address check on the base I/O (F2) card. The base I/O (F2) card and the controller (G2) card can cause this error. • +Address check, ROS adapter (E2-010) -The device addresses are checked at the ROS adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Address check, expansion feature (B2·J13) - The device addresses are checked at the expansion feature (B2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Address check, printer (A2-P12) -The device addresses are checked at the printer adapter card and the error can be probed there. / • +Address check, auxiliary tape (C1-P05) -The device addresses are checked at the auxiliary tape adapter card and the error can be probed there. Only one of the device address lines XO, X1, X2, i or X3, and only one of the device address lines, YO, Y1, Y2, or Y3 will be up when a device is addressed. The device address check, occurs when any odd number of the eight lines is up when a device is addressed. ( ( ( ( (' (~ • +Bus out parity check (F2-D13) -This is a parity check or bus out on the base I/O (F2) card. Either the controller (G2) card or the base I/O (F2) card can cause this error. • +Bus out parity check, ROS adapter (E2-B 11) - The parity of bus out is tested on the ROS adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, expansion feature (B2-M02) -The parity of bus out is tested on the expansion feature (B2) card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, printer (A2-P12) -The parity of bus out is tested on the printer adapter card and the error can be probed there. • +Bus out parity check, auxiliary tape (C1-P04) - The parity of bus out is tested on the auxiliary tape adapter card and the error can be probed there. 2. Reseat all cards and cables. 3. Check voltages. 4. Check the customers AC ground. 5. Check the fan(5). Tape Use the following procedure to help you find the cause of intermittent tape errors: 1. Any cartridges that were written before a problem was resolved on the tape drive, can still cause problems. 2. Check the cartridge stops (see 224). 3. Perform the Tape Select Magnet Service Check (see 222). 4. Clean the tape head with isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue. Check the head adjustment (see 231). Replace the head if it is worn. 5. Clean the spindle assembly and the drive rolls with isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue. 6. Reset all the cables and the cards in the tape unit. 7. Check to be sure the tape unit does not face into a strong light or the sun. 8. Make sure the brake arms are white and not black. AC Power Grounding Checks To check for proper AC power receptacle grounding, measure the AC voltages at the location shown in the following figure. This check does not detect a poor quality ground (high resistance to earth). GrOUndrn° ~ ~. ~ ~Neutral _ Hot Front View If you suspect a line problem you can: 1. Place an isolation transformer between the line and the 5100 computer. 2. Inspect the AC box to be sure the wires do not cross. The line side and load side wires should not cross as this can induce line spikes in the load side wires. 3. Check the AC box capacitors to ensure they are not twisted and their wires are not crossed. 4. Check for a machine or a device in the same room, on the same line, or anywhere nearby that can induce conductive or inductive noise. The voltage between neutral and ground should be less than 2 volts AC. The voltage between neutral and hot should be approximately 110 Vac to 120 Vac. Also, the voltage between ground and hot should be approximately 110 Vac to 120 Vac. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-33 Check that all frame ground connections are clean and tight in all devices on the system. Frame grounding is indicated either by a braided cable or a green and yellow wire. 5100 ground locations: Bottom cover. center right side CRT mounting screen and frame Power supply fan motor Raceway Power switch AC power box Tape unit motor AC capacitor in tape unit TV monitor plug 5103 ground locations: Left front corner Right front corner AC line cord Flat cable shield clamp Left rear of forms tractor 5106 ground locations: Tape unit motor AC capacitor Cooling fan Power switch AC line cord A1 board Flat cable shield clamp AC Power Considerations Checking for proper AC line voltage is a task that you are familiar with. However. other aspects of the AC power source are also very important. The AC line voltage should not vary by more than ±1 0 % except for 500 ms transients of +15% to -18%. One type of AC power disturbance becoming more frequent is fractional phase loss. This is a result of phase controlled SCRs controlling motors. ovens. or other loads. These devices turn on their loads during each phase and deplete the sine wave of energy. AC Power Terms Current Carrying Ground: This is t~e neutral line that is connected to the neutral bus. 3-84 Neutral Bus: This bus bar is inside the power panel. The other neutral buses should be tied to this bus. The neutral bus should be tied to the ground bus only at the main distribution panel. Main Distribution Panel: This is the first power panel inside of the customer's building. This panel is fed directly from the power company lines. The ground bus in this panel is serviced by the service entrance ground. Ground Bus: This bus bar is in the power panel. The ground wire for the power source of the 5100. along with a wire into the panel from an approved earth ground source. should connect to this bar. Earth Ground: The definition depends upon local electrical building codes. Usually. an earth ground is supplied in two forms: 1. A metal pipe running into the earth and containing running water. Stagnant water or sump lines are not good earth ground sources. nor are lines broken by nonmetal connections. 2. A metal stake driven into the ground. The length of the stake and the depth to which it must be driven into the ground depend on local codes. Noncurrent Carrying Ground: This is the line from the ground in the receptacle to the ground bus. ( ( :{ AC Power Distribution in a Typical Commercial Building Main Distribution Panel I _I I Transformer Neutral I I I oav Center _ Bus ............ ~ . ....... 1" Tap l- I -~ Ground~ Bus N· I Power Panel A I I ~ These buses must be tied to an approved ground source. They These buses Neutral can be tied through wire I t .. 3 I must not be Bus "'-. but, if possible, a ground source 0 tied together should o be supplied through wire Ground., also. ~ in the power panel. Bus It - I I r--........ I I I I B Gro~nd '.~ /' Neutral Hot .. ~ I U ~ U ~ UI~/--~----------------;-~ 120 Vac Receptacle Front View To Other 120 Vac Circuits Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-85 MOl 800 Printer Diagnostics The following chart shows the relationsip of MOl 800 and MOls 801 through 805. MOl 800 tests the entire printer. When MOl 800 detects a failing condition, it halts and displays the test routine that failed. MOl 800 isolates certain failures as shown on the chart or transfers to one of the other MOls shown for further failure isolation. MOls 801 through 805 can be looped by returning to the MOl options and following the instructions on the display. 801 - ( - End of forms Enter ) - No end of forms Forms motion problems MOl Printer (8001 ~ Tests: 5103 circuits and mechanics. ~ 802 -Incorrect status -Voltage checks Analyzes to: A 1 A 1 voltage regulator and sense amp card 803 -Adapter card, I/O cable and signals B 1A 2 adapter card -Carrier motion - Print head motion Left margin -Print head retract Print emitter pickup Print emitter board 804 -Print head interface Power t-- '----+ -Print emitter 805 - Left margin - Left margin timing - Print problems -Print quality 3-86 MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O This MOl tests the communications/serial I/O features which reside on the B2 card. When this MOl detects a failing con· dition, it halts and displays the routine that failed. For descriptions of these routines, refer to the Communications Adapter/Seriall/O Adapter and Diagnostic Routines. MOl 840 Tape Read This diagnostic has two parts: 1. 2. MOl 840 tests the tape unit without tape motion .. MOl 844 tests the tape unit with tape motion. ( MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O Tests: Communications/Serial I/O circuits The chart on this page shows the relationship of MOl 840 through MOl 847. Be sure to record the information in the status bytes for at least the first failure in order to compare status information with the MOl routine causing the halt. Refer to the tape status byte information in this section. MOls 840 and 844 cannot be looped together. To loop on MOl 840, load MOl 840 and remove the tape cartridge be· fore running the MOL Go to the option menu to set up the loop. To loop on MOl 844, load and run MOl 844. Go to the option menu to set up the loop. MOl 840 and 844 can be run for both the internal or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. However, a confusion factor exists since all references are to the 5106 Auxiliary Tape unit. Also, the MOl subsection has to be loaded from the internal tape unit and might be difficult to load depending on the frequency of the failure. ( Analyzes to: Communications: Timer interrupts Data set ready Clear to send Data through the communications circuits Long space interrupts Serial I/O: Timer interrupts Data set ready Clear to send Data through the serial I/O circuits ( Enter 841 -Cartridge in place - File protect -LED, BOT, EOT • MOl 840 Tape Read Tests: Tape read without tape motion Analyzes to: Status reset - 842 -Erase -Select magnets --. 843 - - Interrupt Data th rough tape control card ( Interrupt Read check 845 -Catridge in place -Read data -Customer error codes 002·014 MOl 844 Tape Read ( Tests: Tape read with tape motion 846 - BOT -EOT -Tape speed 847 -Tape motion Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-87 MOl 860 Tape Write Diagnostic This MOl tests all the tape write functions of the internal and the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. It also analyzes all failures except erase as shown in the following chart. Be sure to record the tape status on at least the first failure. Refer to the tape status byte information in this section. Enter ,I'" MDI 860 Tape Write Tests: Tape write head and circuits Analyzes to: Velocity Acceleration 861 -Analyzes t~. erase Deceleration Write/read back Symmetry (See Note 1 ) Peak shift (See Note 2) Read/write head azimuth (See Note 3) Binds in customer cartridge (See Note 4) Notes: The following notes are for instructional purposes c o c c o c only. The drawings are not meant to be scope pictures as the diagnostics are designed to check the tolerances. 1. Symmetry -The bit cells are of equal duration. This is a function of the tape read/write channel. The tape velocity tested OK in a previous routine. Undistorted , I Raw Data I : ': I 1 I I : I I I ----1-, I r---, I I----J I I : Clock Clock Clock I tJ ,..--1., ; t J r-----' LJ r--- I LJ Peak Shifted LJ I I I 1 Raw Data I Raw Data --.-- 3. Azimuth -The physical angular alignment of the Bit Cell read/write head gap with the recorded transitions on the tape. It is similar to skew, but due to recording data serial by bit and by character (as apposed to parallel recording on 7 and 9 track tape) it is referred '.. / to as azimuth. 2. Peak Shift -The timing shift of the analog signal peaks 4. Binds in customer cartridge -All tape write tests is due to the bit pattern and to the tape to read/write head must run satisfactorily with the diagnostic cartridge relationship. This is a function of reading tape. prior to inserting the customers cartridge. 3-88 MOl 890 DIAGNOSTIC SECTIONS MOl 890 allows you to select the same routines as used in the other MOls. In other words, routine PT03 in MOl 890 is the same as PT03 in MOl 800. However, the routines in MOl 890 do not halt or branch when sensing a failing condition. The main advantage of MOl 890 is that it allows you to select individual MOl sections which is especially useful when scoping intermittent failures. ( ( Enter l 891 - Tap'e write routines. These are the same routines as MOls 840, 841,843,844, MOl 890 Diagnostic Section ~ 845,846, and 847. Provides selection of routines for I/O devices. 892 - 5103 J>rinter routines. These are the same routines as MOl 800,801,802,803,804, and 805. 893 - Tape read routines. These are the same routines as MOl 860 and 861. ~ 894 - Communications/Serial I/O routines. These are the same routines as those in MOl 820. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-89 5100 SYMPTOM INDEX ( , Symptom Intermittent process checks with all I/O devices attached. Isolation Aid Remove all the I/O devices to see if the problem still occurs. Fix Replace the printer adapter card. "" ( '",--/ Intermittent process checks and bring Check the power cable plug (YU1) on Reform the clamp holding Y1. up failures. the A 1 board. The clamp might be formed wrong; this allows the plug to fall out. Process check on power up. Suspect the K2 storage card. Swap Replace the K2 card. the K2 card with another storage card to verify this. Go to DISPLAY REGISTERS. If ROLO Replace the G2 card. , j Bring up failure on power up. is 0006, the failure is in the bring up 1 diagnostic. Fails to power up intermittently. Fans None. Replace the POWER ON/POWER run but there is no voltage to A 1 OFF switch. board. Fails to power up within five seconds Remove the AC fan motor plug and If the machine powers up, suspect after power down (30 to 90 seconds). the AC tape motor plug at the AC the wiring of the AC box. box. Then power up. Blows card and land patterns on A 1 Check the TV monitor line cord wiring The customer must have the TV board after installing a TV monitor. for an error causing chassis to be hot monitor wiring corrected. (110 AC). Keyboard locks with flashing cursor. Check the last key pressed and verify Clean or replace the failing flyplate that it operates. Press the RESTART and / or key module. key to isolate the failing key. Key is pressed and wrong character is None. Replace the ROS card, storage card, displayed. or display card. Unsteady display. Switch to DISPLAY REGISTERS. Repair the connections on the Check the connections on the brightness control. brightness control. No display and registers are not Remove the printer from the system. Replace the printer adapter card. running. Unable to clear messages from None (operator error). Do not use undefined function keys or display line 15 when errors occur copy display without a printer during an input statement. attached to the system. Display character distortion. Adjusting the CRT has little or no Replace the J2 card. effect. TV monitor has wavy or distorted 5100 display is OK. Uncrimp the cable connection to the characters. TV monitor. 166 APL halts in BASIC. The problem shows up in new Do not use new unmarked tapes as unmarked tapes copied by the tape output for the tape copy program. copy program. Mark the new tapes with at least one file before using. 3-90 ,--/, / / " Symptom 003 through 010 intermittent errors. 003 and 004 errors when marking new tapes. 003, 004, and 007 errors. ( 003, 004, 007 and 008 errors. 004 and 007 errors on diagnostics and customer jobs. 004 and 007 errors. 004,005, 006, 007, and 008 errors. 004, 007, and 008 errors. 007 errors. Isolation Aid Fix Check the customer grounding and Check to see if customer is using an the 5100 grounding. ungrounded extension cord. None. Replace the LED/PTX assembly. Check for bad solder connections at Replace or repair the cables and verify paddle cards and cable connectors. that all connections are good. Also check for strands of wire shorting to pins. None. Replace the H2 card. Moving the cable that goes to the Replace the CRT. CRT away from the tape control card causes the problem to disappear. Loose read/write head. Replace the read/write head. The customer usually sees only 005 Adjust tape microswitches for a errors, but can create 007 errors clearance of 0.001 inches (0.025 mm) unknowingly. to 0.003 inches (0.076). Adjust for maximum overtravel. Locking wheels are not centered or Adjust the locking wheels (see 225) seated properly in the base. and check the adjustment by pulling the cartridge out about 1/8 inch (3 mm) and releasing it. The cartridge should seat in the tape unit. Excessive retries. Check the select magnet and the jackshaft adjustments. (See 222 and 223.) The motor locks up or does not move Replace the motor. the tape properly. The tape rubs against the cartridge Reposition the tape on the spools by base plate or plastic top. doing a )LlB or UTIL; then mark a file to the end of tape and do a rewind. Extra bytes are written in the data Check out the tape by doing a )LlB or record filed on the diagnostic tape UTIL on the diagnostic tape cartridge. cartridge during a CMD 0 or CMD 1. If this works, load the failing file using the CMD 8 function. If there is an error in the data, an 007 error will be displayed. You can rebuild the damaged file using a known good tape and CMD 8 and CMD 9 procedures. The display is not blanked during tape IN PROCESS and PROCESS CHECK operations. leads are swapped. (See 210 for correct wiring). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-91 Symptom 007 and 008 errors. Isolation Aid Fix The spindle is glazed from improper Clean the spindle and drive rolls using contact pressure between the spindle isopropyl alcohol. and· the tape cartridge. This causes retries and tape errors. The customer cannot copy a complete tape to another tape or complains that tapes have different storage capacity. Spindle or jacks haft bearings. Check for proper wiring of the I/O device. All tapes have 204K bytes storage capacity. New files requireO.5K bytes for each file header. This must be considered when you set up the files. Replace as required. Wire the I/O device to provide' data terminal ready' if the 5100 is acting as a modem. If the device is acting as a terminal, wire the I/O device to provide 'data set ready'. Check the brake arms to ensure they are white. 010 and 012 errors. Noisy tape drives. SIO fails to run the I/O device. 004 error. Tape does not move. Fails when started after being inactive for some time. 012 error. 007. error with printer attached. 007 error. Check to see if the tape unit is facing Prevent direct sunlight from entering a window. the tape drive opening. Disconnect the 5103 printer to eliminate the error. Find out if the tape cartridge was in! the tape drive when the power was turned on or off. Replace the G2 card. Do not power the 5100 on or off with the tape cartridge in the drive. Check jumper J2G07 to ground. In BASIC, rows of 1's, 3's, 5's, or 9's None. appear. In APL, CRT is blank. Tape binds when being inserted or does not seat properly. 004, 007 tape· errors. Pr()cessor checks or printer errors with the 5106 attached. Processor check on 860. Diagnostic tape is damaged or 007 error occurs when diagnostic tape is run. Do the stop adjustments and ensure The window on the tape cartridge should have some clearance between the outer edge of the stop is parallel the deflector and the right stop. to the edge of the tape unit upright. Find out if the operator is continuing to key when the tape is running. Do not key while the tape is running. See if BVD fails E-5. Disconnect the Repair the defective I/O connector in 5103 and 5106. the 5106. Swap storage cards to stop error on Replace G2 card. Do not put the diagnostic tape cartridge in the tape drive when performing CMDO or CMD1 or the tape will be destroyed. Check jumpers from A 1 J2G07 to A1J2P08 and from A1G2S07 to A1G2S09. / 806. None. Processor checks occur on power up, Check jumpers on the A 1 board. but· restart works OK. , 3-92 c ( ( ( Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Intermittent tape errors 004, 007, and None. Adjust the select magnets for correct OOS. air gap. A 152 error did not occur when Check to see if failure occurs only on Alter storage size to 6 bytes less than loading a file larger than 64K bytes. 64K machines. 64K when trying to load a file larger than 64K. Intermittent processor checks from Usually fails when keying fast. Replace F2 card. the keyboard. Blank CRT. None. Check that the CRT connector is plugged in properly. The end of the cable that has 5 wires must be toward the front of the 5100. Intermittent processor checks. Meter the process check for a '+RDR' Replace the CRT. error. Intermittent processor checks on halt Unplug the fan (for no more than 15 Replace E2 card. 11S with bring up diagnostics. minutes) to cause a solid failure. 003 and 004 tape errors. Check the status byte in location Correct defective read/write head. OOSF. The byte will be 35 for normal and 39 with this error. On the 5100 model C, the character Failure still occurs when you enter Replace C2 card. entered does not match the character characters with about 15 to 20 keyed. seconds' delay between strokes. Dropping power. Plug the power supply into another Replace POWER ON/OFF switch. 5100 to be sure it works. Noisy tape drives. Fails usually in one direction. Replace jackshaft. Keyboard locks up intermittently. None. Replace CRT. Power up fails intermittently. Switch J 1 and J2 plugs. Replace the POWER ON/OFF switch. Processor checks on power up. None. Check Y1 cable plugging. Fading CRT. None. Replace G2 card. No power to A 1 board. Check the AC voltage on the output Replace the AC line filter. of the line filter. Print plot stops intermittently. None. Replace G2 card. 004 and 007 errors. None. Replace internal or external cable. Tape errors. None. Replace CRT. Characters on the CRT are different Characters at the top left corner of Replace F2 and J2 cards. sizes. the CRT are larger than those at the bottom right corner. Intermittent '+RDR' processor checks. The error becomes solid when you Replace F2 card. unplug the fan for 15 minutes or less. CRT display jitters. Check the connectors on the Replace J2 card or the CRT. brightness control potentiometer. Character entered does not match the None. Replace defective display, storage, or character on the CRT. ROS card. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-93 5100 SERVICE TIPS • You can either swap the parts of the internal and auxiliary tape units, or you can physically or DANGER electrically swap the complete tape units. To swap Do not touch or attempt to remove the coax cable electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket of the while the TV monitor is plugged into an AC outlet. 5100 A1 board with the cable socket in socket B4 of There is the possibility of 110 volts being carried on the Auxiliary Tape Unit. The internal tape unit the coax BNC connector and the cable shield, if the address is now E40 (BASIC) or 002 (APL). TV monitor has not been properly modified by the user. This voltage could also appear on the frame of the 5100. Tape File Recovery This procedure can be used to recover tape files before and after a defective file (CRCin header). To identify a defective file, do a UTIL or )UB of the cartridge starting with file 1. General Tips Use the following example: Files 1 through 4 are good, • Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by: file 5 is defective (CRC in header), files 6 through 10 are Vibrating the machine/cards/connections. good. By using the normal load and save commands, Raising the machine temperature (unplug the you can save files 1 through 4. When file 5 is reached blower). (defective file). remove the cartridge and manually move the tape forward past a load of the file 6, and repeat CAUTION the load and save operations for fields 6 through 10. Do not exceed 20 minutes. (Be sure to save to a different tape and mark as required.) By marking file 4 on the defective tape one K larger than it was, you can reuse the tape. All files past file 3 are now lost. Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit coolant). • Machine power switch must be down (off) when you remove the read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, N4). All other cards can be removed with power switch up (on). • You can remove the following cards/devices if they are not part of the failing operation or when you are trying to isolate to a failing operation: A2-1 /0 cable driver card B2-Communications card C2-Asynchronous communication/serial I/O card APL cards (C2, 02, 04, H4) if the failure is in BASIC -BASICcard C4 if the failure is in APL Read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2, M4, N2, N4) 5103 Printer 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit 3-94 r ',,- j ( ( ( ( ( Tape Mark This procedure allows you to remark (initialize) a tape if file 1 is defective (CRC in header). Be sure to recover all files after file 1 before using this procedure. Recover all data possible before doing this. Use the file recovery procedure first. 1. Rewind the tape and do a UTIL or )LlB to ensure file 1 is defective. 2. Rewind the tape to the loed point (single hole in tape). 3. Remove the tape and wind the load point hole onto the right reel. 4. Jumper U10 to U08 on the back of the tape unit (control card pin side) (227). 5. Insert the tape and with a thin screw driver reach in from the right side of the tape unit and push the jackshaft to the left. This causes the tape to move forward. Move the tape forward about six inches. S. Release the jackshaft. 7. Remove the jumper. 8. Rewind the tape. 9. Mark the tape starting in file 1. Freelanee Aids Isolation aids that can be used when freelancing: 1. Disconnect one or both external I/O devices. CAUTION The last cabled I/O device must have a terminator or you will get proceS$ checks and bring-up diagnostic errors. The 5103 has its own internal terminator. 2. Remove all but 16K bytes of storage and uSe extra cards to isolate the problem. 3. Remove the A2 card to isolate the 5100 from the external I/O. 4. Remove the B2 card to isolate the 5100 from the communications and/or SID. 5. Disconnect the CRT connector if a display is not needed. 6. All 5100 cards except read/write storage can be pulled with power on. 7. All pins except voltage pins can be tied down. 8. Check all voltages. 9. Disconnect the fan motor to heat the machine and aggravate the failure. CAUTION Do not exceed 20 minutes of machine operation without fan running and COVl;lrs installed. Intermittent FaillJres Troubleshooting Guide 3-95 Card and Board Jumpers Failures on the 5100 which are hard to analyze might be associated with the jumper installed on the A 1 board, the G2 card, or the J2 card. In several cases, the jumpers have been missing or loose. When working with the A 1 board or its cards, be sure that the jumpers are installed correctly. If you are experiencing any of the following symptoms, check the jumpers: (See 209 for the correct jumpering of the logic cards.) 1. Process check on power up, but restart works properly. 2. No display; will not restart; meaningless data on the display. 3. Single row of digits across the bottom of the display, or blank display. 4. Unable to analyze process checks; or, more than one type of process check at the same time. 5. Wrong characters printed on the printer or displayed on the display. 3-96 Read/Write Head (007) Errors The following read/write head adjustment procedure might decrease 007 tape errors: 1. Remove the tape control card. 2. Loosen the read/write head. 3. Position the read/write head against the front and left of the mounting recess and tighten the mounting screw (facing the front of the machine). 4. Make sure the read/write head grounding wire clears the cartridge door when the cartridge is inserted. 5. Clean the read/write head with isopropyl alcohol part 220020C and lint free tissue. 6. Replace the tape control card and test the 5100 using the tape read test and MOl 860. Intermittent Process Checks If you are experiencing intermittent process checks on the 5100 and cannot determine the type or the cause, see Error Checking in the Theory section. When an error occurs, do not reset the machine. This will allow you to probe the failing line. Dropping Records If you are experiencing dropping records from files, or if you are getting 009 or 152 errors, check the file to see which recent changes were made and if the file is larger than the available workspace. If you load a data file into storage, get a 152 error, make changes or corrections to that file, and then save the file, all data beyond the available storage will be lost. To eliminate losing these files, change or update the files under program control. ,/ ( ( ( Attachment of a TV Monitor A modified TV set must have isolation between the primary line voltage and the frame and circuitry of the A standard TV set may be modified and used as a video set. This can be accomplished by using an isolation monitor for the 5100. transformer between your outlet line voltage and the voltage input to the TV set. This transformer should be Generally, modifying a standard TV set and using it as a permanently wired into the circuit. The new input power video monitor yields less satisfactory results than using plug must be a three-prong grounded plug with the a regular video monitor. This is because the same level ground connected to the chassis of the TV set. This of quality is not built into TV receivers as is found in grounding circuit must be electrically connected to the monitor class units. For example, the contrast and 5100 grounding circuit. resolution are not as good on a modified TV receiver; thus the image is not as sharp and is usually more Before the video input is connected to anything, it difficult to read. should be tested to verify that the connector's external shell is at ground potential and that no line voltage is However, if a TV receiver is modified and used as a present on either the external shell or the center video monitor, the following procedure must be conductor. observed, or exposure to a severe electric shock or damage to the 5100 may occur when the TV set is It is the responsibility of the TV modifier to ensure that connected to the IBM 5100. the input circuit meets the requirements of the 5100 output and will not damage the 5100. IBM will not modify the TV receiver. Three-Prong Isolation TV Grounded Plug Output Transformer Note: If a TV receiver is modified for use as a video monitor, IBM accepts no responsibility for safety precautions during conversion and hookup, for damages incurred to the TV receiver or 5100, or for the quality of the TV receiver as a video monitor. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-97 Monitor Video Out Service Check Set up the scope as follows: Use an x10probe Connect channel 1 to A 1 K2B04 (+ monitor video) Set these switches: Sync -internal Sweep -auto trigger CHl volts/div -0.1 volts Time/Div -10 p.s Slope -(-) minus Coupling - D.C. Note: Be sure to ground the scope probe. With the 5100 power switch set to ON and the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch set to DISPLAY REGISTERS, you should see the following pattern on the scope: B A 1---.------'" 641-1 s -----..,.1 Ground ------------------------------------------------------------------- A = 1.0 volts minimum to ground B = = 1.4 volts minimum to ground C 2.25 volts minimum to ground D = 63.3 p. seconds for one sweep of + monitor video The TV monitor, when connected, should provide a 75....1"".. termination load to the 5100 source ground. If several monitors are to be used, they should be daisy chained and the last monitor in the string terminated with 75-,,-. In some cases the 5100 may overdrive the TV monitor. It may, therefore, be necessary for the customer to add a 75-"'-.attenuator to the back of the 5100. 3-98 "-- ,/ PRINTER SYMPTOM INDEX Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Resolder the connections or replace the cable. Process checks with the 5103 Printer Check the solder connections on the or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit I/O interface connectors. attached to the 5100. ( Wavy print or 057 errors (vertical print The print head might be touching the Check that the emitter board and alignment). foam on the inside of the cover. pickup are adjusted properly. Remove a small portion of the foam if necessary. If the print head is moved manually, the characters will not line up with the characters printed before the interruption. 051,054, and 058 errors. Check the forms guide rack for proper Ground the forms guide rack. Be sure grounding. the screw fastening the ground strap to the forms guide is making good contact. None. Check the bottom of the printer for two orange shipping bolts. Check the screws on capacitors C 1 and C2 to make sure they are tight. Capacitors C1, C2, and C4 measure OK with no power applied. Carrier drive belt dirty. Check for missing +24 V and +10.5 V. Check for print wires protruding through the print head. Errors occur when running MDI 800. Replace the print emitter pickup card. (See the 5103 MIM.) Remove the orange shipping bolts using the 5103 unpacking instructions. Tighten all screws on these capacitors. Replace the C1 card. C1 breaks down under power. Clean or replace the belt. (See the 5103 MIM.) Replace transistor Q1 in the 51.03 Printer power supply. (See the 5103 MIM.) Replace the ribbon. Replace the print emitter pickup card. (See the 5103 MIM.) 056 and 057 errors when running MD1800. Forms gear binds on the top cover. 050 to 059 errors. ~ ,1 051 errors when attempting to print. 056 and 057 errors. Tighten the eccentric and/or print Check print head and carrier head. assembly. Make sure the carrier is mounted solidly to the guide bars. Also check the eccentric to be sure it is positioned properly. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-99 Symptom Intermittent 051 through 059 errors and other intermittent problems. Isolation Aid Fix .. Check all grounds on the 5103 Printer Check the AC power source for and on the 5100. proper grQUnEling. Check that the forms tractor unit is mounted securely on the printer. Check the frame ground to forms guide. Check the ground strap connections. Check the I/O interface cable grounds. Check for noise being generated by other equipment on the AC power line. r' Wavy printing. occurs, or left margin varies by one position. None. Place printer on a solid surface. Reposition the paper deflector on the left side. Replace the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.1 Tighten the power supply mounting screws. Fails to print in the first few positions None. in each line. All print wires fire at the left margin or the motor hangs up at the left margin. End of forms and forms motion problems. Check the emitter pickup for excessive solder that might be shorting out the print emitter board. Check the screws inthe 5100 power supply. Loose mounting screws can cause noise to be generated throughout the system. Forms feed fails to index. Check for binds and other mechanical Repair binds in the platen gears, idler problems. gears, forms motor/emitter assembly, or forms tractor unit. See the 5103 MIM for adjustments and replacement. Replace the broken idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter assembly. Adjust or replace the forms emitter assembly. Replace the forms feed emitter amplifier. I Adjust or replace the end of forms switch. Replace the motor driver card (A 1 B 1 I . Forms run backward. Fails to print. None. Do a copy display. Adjust the forms emitter. (See the 5103 MIM.1 Replace the printer adapter card. :3-100 : . Symptom Isolation Aid None. Fix Adjust or replace the end of forms switch. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust or replace the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust the copy control dial. ( ( Fails to print or head fails to move. Adjust the print head to platen clearance. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check for shorts between the print emitter and print emitter pickup. Print plot fails to print. Extra line spaces. Printer diagnostics should run OK. Replace the G2 card in the 5100. ( Check for excessive play in gear train. Adjust or repair excessive gear play. (See the 5103 MIM.) This causes incorrect partial lines. Adjust or replace the forms emitter. (See the 5103 MIM.) Variable line sl*lcing (forms creep). Excessive play in the gears. The forms emitter is not adjusted properly. Adjust the gear wink. Adjust the forms emitter. (See 5103 MIM.) The forms tractor unit is not mounted securely. (( Print line skewed or crooked. The forms tractor unit must be parallel with the platen and seated at all four mounted points. Remove the right side cover and loosen the two shaft screws 1 / 8 to 1 /4 turn to allow the forms tractor to seat properly. Check for cover interference. Uneven left margin. None. Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) 1:( Missing part of the character in print position 1. None. Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103 MIM.) Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Overpri nti ng. Overprinting occurs if a print emitter error is detected while a line is being printed. If the data is correct. check for a defective or misadjusted print emitter or print emitter pickup. Adjust or replace the print emitter or the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-101 Symptom Backward printing '(mir~or image). Isolation Aid Check the parallelism between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Use the two small land patterns on the top right side of the printer to aid you in making this check. The distance between the land patterns and the print emitter pickup should not vary more than 0.025 inches (0.64 mm). Fix Reform the right side frame near the support shaft. Adjust the gap between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Also check that the print emitter moves freely as the horizontal fine adjustment knob is turned to both extremes. Check the ground locations. / I I Adjust or replace the end of the forms switch. (See the 5103 MIM.) I Replace the print head cable. (See the 5103 MIM.) Adjust or replace the print emitter or the print emitter pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.) Light printing. Adjust the copy control dial. Replace the ribbon. Adjust the clearance between the print head and the platen. (See the 5103 MIM.) One end of a print line is darker. Check the A-frame alignment. (See the 5103 MIM.) The ribbon is not advancing. Check for broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches, and incorrect alignment of the ribbon drive gears. Also check that the ribbon feed roll release knob is in the proper position. Not enough tension on the two print Check for 700 to 900 grams of head springs. tension at the tip of the print head near the print wires. This measurement should be taken while the platen is removed and with the print head located near the center of the machine. Check for mechanical. binds, sticking, or other interference that would prevent the print head from making complete contact with the platen. Especially check the print head cable. Every other line has light printing. None. Check for broken ribbon drive lines. Check for a defective ribbon drive clutch. 3~102 I' Symptom Broken print wires. Isolation Aid To prevent breaking print wires: Set the copy control dial to the proper forms thickness. Instruct operators never to print over perforations, feed holes or the edge of the forms. Ensure that all fixes for ribbon jams are installed. Fix ( Printer blows fuses. ( Disconnect EC3 at the print head to Check for more than one active wire drive signal from the system. keep from blowing fuses; then measure the wire driver inputs at cable A1A3 with your meter. All Check for a defective signal cable. inputs should be at an up level of +4.5 to +5.5 Vdc or +1.4 to +20 Vdc. A down level indicates an active level. None. Replace A1A1 card and the Q1 transistor. +24 Vdc supply voltage is too high. Printing stops. Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for The problem can be caused by any of the +5 Vdc to the printer. the following: • Open capacitor C4. • Loose, broken, or poorly crimped wire between C4 and point 1 A. • Open circuit between point 1 A and test point V4. • Loose, broken, or poorly crimped wire between point 4F and capacitor C4. • Open land pattern between point 4F and test point GS. ( Replace the A 1 A 1 card. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-103 Symptom Isolation Aid Fix / Adjust, repair, or replace the end' of Printing stops intermittently or printer Disable the end of the forms switch by jumpering A1-A3D13 to prints backward when running forms switch, the wiring, or the diagnostics or programs. mechanism. (See the 5103 MIM.) Al-A3C08. Ifthe symptom disappears, the problem is in the end of the forms switch, the mechanism, or the wiring. Printing stops. Check the print emitter or print emitter pickup boards for warpage or contaminants. Adjust, repair, or replace as required. (See the 5103 MIM.) Component failures are not always Replace the forms feed photocell detected by the static checks. They assembly or forms feed emitter can, however, cause the printer to fail amplifier. (See the 5103 MIM.1 under dynamic (operating) conditions. An oscilloscope normally is required to detect these problems. Print head carrier stops near right side. Check that the belt clamp does not touch the print head stepper motor when the print head carrier is moved to the extreme right. None. Adjust the belt clamp as required. "" r· , / 051 error. Replace print head cable. Breaking print wires, jamming ribbon, Check for the correct part number on If the H2 card is part 1607112 and and jamming paper. the printer adapter card and the H2 the printer adapter card is part card. 1607124, the adapter card is for a 120 characters per second printer. Replace the printer adapter card with part 1607130, which is for a 60 characters per second printer. Solid 050 error. Probe the P13 pin on the printer adapter card to ensure 'EOF line is up. ON/OFF switch checks OK. Repair defective A 1 power board. ' " .. ,/ Intermittent 057 errors while printing. 051 errors. Print emitter board course adjustment Tighten print emitter board course screws are loose. adjustment screws. Check for +8.5 volts in the 5103. If the +8.5 volt power is missing, repair the connection on the A 1 power connector in the 5100. Replace the missing pin that holds the print head pulley to the stepper motor. When error codes are checked and 052 errors occur, replace defective forms emitter stepper motor. 057 and 059 errors. None. Forms movement problem with no error codes. Customer uses APL, and program is not checking for error codes. 3·104 ( ( Symptom Isolation Aid Fix Not printing some dots (on print plot All diagnostics run OK. Replace print head. only). Forms feeding fails to stop on 050 None. Repair bouncing EOF switch or adjust error. EOF switch. Missing dots, or extra dots printed. The 5103 may add or drop a Replace F2 card in the 5100. complete vertical line for a character and have no error halts. Solid 052 errors. Copy display fails. Replace F2 card in the Sioo. Print misalignment vertically. When running MOl 800, the second Check for binds or replace the ribbon or third line of Hs are misaligned drive roll assembly. vertically. 051 errors. Check for voltages dropping when the Replace C2, C3, or C4 capacitors. error occurs. Intermittent or solid 052 errors. Probe the signal on the printer Replace the A2 card or cable in the adapter card pin C5J 13. It should be 5100. pulsing. Failure to print or 057 errors occur Check for +5 volts at TP-V5. Replace shorted emitter board. when trying to power up a 5100 APL machine with the 5103 printer turned on. Left margin varies. Printer recently changed from an 80 Ensure that the H2 card is part characters per second to a 120 1607126. characters per second machine. Intermittent 056 errors. Fails when printing right to left past Repair print head cable. position 100. 057 errors or wavy print. Print head does not move smoothly. Replace print emitter board. 052 errors. Check 'forms emitter A' line at pin Replace forms emitter stepper motor V07 and 'forms emitter B' line at pin assembly. S12. Both lines should be pulsing when the printer is spacing paper. Carrier belt not tracking correctly. Belt is improperly adjusted. Move print head to the right margin and adjust the carrier belt. Paper jams. Not a new style printer with the Check for bent pins on the tractor ON/OFF switch on the front. assembly. Check to see the ECA 11 (EC 812672) is installed. Print plot has misaligned dots. None. Use paper with a thickness of 0.0030 to 0.0075 inches (0.075 to 0.188 mm). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-105 PRINTEft SERVICE TIPS Reset Signal Line Checkout A 'reset' signal line that is not functioning pl'OJ)erly will not always cause printer failures. Consequently, there is no particular symptom associated with this problem. If you suspect that the 'rl!!sef signal line is not functioning properly. use the fbllowing J)rocedure to check out the 'reset' signal in the printer: 1. Power down the 5100. 2. Do not power down the printer. 3. Probe B1-84, 812 (-Reset). 4. Power up the 5100. 5. Check that the probe DOWN light is ori. 6. Press the HOLD key. Press the CMD key and the + key to copy the display. 7. Check that the probe UP light is on. B. Power down the printer. 9. Check that the probe DOWN light is on. ~rint Emitter Timing Using MOl 805 If you are doing left margin adjustments, run MOl 805. This MOl checks the timing of the left margin. You can also loop on step to theck for intermittent errors. If you do the print emitter pickup adjustment 340, do the left margin adjustment 343 and run MOl 800 to verify the adjustments. 3-106 Forms Emitter Timing Scope Procedure 1. Remove the forms tractor unit and the paper. 2. Move the copy control dial to eliminate printing on the . platen. 3. Load printer diagnostic MOl BOO. Loop on the step number that indicates quick forms movement test (PT01V5). / 4. Place the scope lead On U07 on the printer adapter card (forms emitter A). Display one pulse on the screen. Good: Adjust until display looks like this: Bad: __ -..o!J Bad: u n 1 1.. --~"---- Forms Jams The following items can cause forms jams and incorrect forms movement: There is incorrect pressure plate clearance on the forms tractor. The paper deflector is too close to the platen. The cut form guide on the left rear top cover is not flipped back or it is used with continuous forms. The paper path is incorrect. See the BASIC or APL reference manuals for correct forms feed paths. . ... ./ Forms are being used that are thicker than specified. The maximum forms thickness allowed is 0.018 inch (4.572 mm). See the Form Design Reference Guide, GA24-348B. The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen. The forms tractor unit is not parallel with the platen and is not fully seated at all four mounting points. All the pressure rolls do not contact the platen evenly. Ribbon Jams Check the following items if you are experiencing frequent ribbon jams: The ribbon shield is not adjusted properly. There is improper tracking of the ribbon through the ribbon feed rolls. The ribbon should not be above the rollers more than 0.010 to 0.015 inch (0.254 to 0.381 mm). If the ribbon is above the rollers, one of the following could be the cause: • The rollers are not adjusted properly. Check that the rollers are the same height and are not cocked. f • The print head cover is hitting the print cable near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left side of the head cover to rise and lift the ribbon off the print head. If this condition is present, cut a small portion from the head cover where it hits the head cable. • The ribbon box may be positioned too low. Loosen the two screws holding the ribbon box to the carrier (one on the left side and one in the bottom of the box), and raise or lower the box for proper ribbon tracking through the ribbon rollers. Retighten the screws. ( -The ribbon drive rolls are sticking. Remove and clean the rollers. There are metal spacers in the ribbon roller assembly between the rubber rolls and the plastic housing. Replace the rollers if either spacer is missing (one at the top of the rollers and one at the bottom). -The print wires are protruding beyond the face of the print head by more than 0.002 inch (0.0508 mm). The copy control dial is improperly set. The dial should be set for good print quality on the last (/ copy and no smudging on the first copy. The numbers on the copy control dial do not correspond to the number of parts in the form. (~: Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-107 5103 FORMS FEED STEPPER MOTOR/EMITTER 5. Connect the probe power lead (red) to test point TIMING V5 and the black lead to G6. 6. Place the Printer Adapter card in the service Adjustment position on machines with EC 579623 or EC 579920. Refer to the 5103 MIM (312). Two techniques are available for the adjustment of the emitter timing: the general logic probe method and a 7. Probe A2-U07 on the B1 board with the probe program that must be entered manually. The logic probe ground lead on P08. On machine~ without EC method provides sufficient accuracy for normal printer 579623 or EC 579920, probe TPA on the forms applications, but, print/ plot applications that require feed emitter amplifier card. with the probe reverse forms motion may need to use the programming ground lead on test point G8. technique. 8. Power up. General Logic Probe (GLP) Adjustment Method 9. Slide the photocell down as far as possible. 1. Power down. 10. Slowly slide the assembly up until the probe UP light comes on. 2. Remove the printer cover. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). Note: If the UP light is on with the photocell down as far as possible, slide the assembly up until the 3. Connect a jumper wire between test points FMA UP light goes out and then comes back on. and G7 • (forms motor driver A to ground). a. Hold the photocell assembly firmly in place and a. Move the black wire from TPB2-6C to tighten the two screws. TPB2-3C. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). b. Verify the adjustment as follows: b. Move the red wire from TPB2-5B to TPB2-6C. -Apply a small amount of forward force on the platen knob. The probe should stay at 4. Loosen the photocell assembly (two screws II the up level when you remove your hand behind the motor) so that the assembly will slide from the knob. but not move by itself. -Apply a small amount of backward force on the platen knob. The probe should stay at a down level when you remove your hand from the knob. c. Readjust if necessary. d. Power down. e. Move the red wire from TPB2-6C back to TPB2-5B. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). f. Move the black wire from TPB2-3C back to TPB2-6C. ,/ TPB 0 / TPAO Right End VieVli 3-108 11. Remove the probe and jumper wire. Reinstall the ( printer adapter card on machines that required removal. 12. Reinstall the printer cover and forms tractor unit. 13. Check the adjustment by running MOl 800; readjust if necessary. ( Note: If adjusted incorrectly, the forms motor might run backwards. ( Manual Entry Programming Method This technique is similar to the 5110 MOl 0800 emitter adjustment routine and may be used on both the 5100 and the 5110 computer systems. Initial set-up for the adjustment should include the installation of the tractor assembly and the insertion and engagement of paper under the platen with platen rolls engaged. Initial entries on the 5100 computer system are: 1. Load OCP1 normal mode (See DCP 1 Normal Mode in this section.) 2. Alter read/write storage locations 3F70 through 3FFF by entering the data given in the data table that follows. 3. Press the spacebar after all characters have been entered. 4. Enter: BR 3F70. 5. Press the EXECUTE key. Refer to the following material on Test Description in this section. ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-109 DATA TABLE Read/Write Storage Location Data , 3F70 8541 8645 8700 A005 858B 868A 8740 840C 3F80 8000 0204 15EO OF54 OB01 0500 C003 AOO5 3F90 1560 OF64 FBFF 05AE OC01 1500 1590 0904 3FAO 05EE COOB OE47 OE45 D101 1593 01E6 5108 3FBO 159F 8804 CE45 CE4E 0847 0807 01A4 01E7 3FCO C185 AOO7 7FBO OAE4 CMOC A011 FCOO 01CC 3FOO 01C6 C103 0094 OF74 7FBO CB04 F005 1510 3FEO DC01 8000 FCOO 01CC 01C6 C103 F009 OD47 3FFO 0024 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Test Description: When the program has begun to execute, the 5103 platen should be rotating back and forth. The accuracy of the emitter adjustment is displayed with a series of arrows. If there are no binds in the carriage and the emitter is in adjustment, approximately 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be pointing up, and 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be point down. If the lines of arrows are not with ± three arrows of being the same length, the forms emitter needs to be adjusted. If the print/ plot feature is on the system using the printer, the emitter should be adjusted to give within ± one arrow of the same length lines. Loosen the forms emitter and move it slightly in the direction of the greater number of arrows. The length of the lines of arrows is an indication of the relative freedom from binds in the platen. The pattern of arrows shown below would require a slight downward adjustment of the emitter to obtain a ± one arrow adjustment accuracy. tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt ttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~+++~+++++~~+~~~+~~++++++~+~+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++~++ ~~~~+~~~+~~~~~~~+~+++++~~+++~+~ 3-110 ( ( Saving the Manually Entered Diagnostic Program: The diagnostic program may be saved on a tape cartridge that can be reserved for this purpose. Do not store the program on the diagnostic tape or in a used file. Insert a scratch tape cartridge with a file marked for at least 1 K bytes. , GENERAL PROBLEM SOLVING General Procedures General procedures to resolve intermittent and miscellaneous problems follow: • Whenever possible, identify the problem area (such as forms feed, print head, ribbon feed). The customer-reported symptom may be used to do this, especially if the diagnostics run without error. If a problem area can be identified, refer to the Diagnostic Aids section of this manual and select an MDI pertaining to the area or problem. • Check the mechanical parts for loose screws, broken springs, loose parts, binds, interference, or other visual problems. When possible, operate the mechanical parts manually to find clues to the problem. • Ensure that all connectors, cards, wires, and jumpers are securely plugged. • Check all connectors, taper pins, and other terminals for poor crimps, defective parts, excessively loose contacts, or other noticeable problems. • Check for wires or cables that might be pinched or are intermittently shorting. • Check for broken wires that might break contact intermittently. • Check for discoloring of the circuit cards that might indicate overheating of a component. After any repairs or corrections, run the diagnostics to verify proper operation. To store locations 3F70 through 3FFF, perform the following steps: 1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode. Enter: C Hold down the CMD key and press 9. Enter: 3F70 3FFF 0001 OO4B 0000 Press the EXECUTE key. 2. ( 3. 4. 5. This program will write the data stored from 3F70 through 3FFF into file 0001 of the tape cartridge. A different file may be used but the 0001 must be changed to a different file number and entered in hexadecimal to identify the different file. ( Loading the Forms Emitter Test Program from Tape: Perform the following steps to load the test program from the tape cartridge: 1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode. Enter: C Hold down the CMD key and press 8 on the numeric key pad. Enter: 3F70 0001 0000 Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will be loaded form file 0001 [hex] of the tape cartridge.) Enter: BR 3F70 Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will begin to execute.) Note: The file number must be in hex. 2. 3. 4. 5. ( -. 6. 7. ( If a file other than file 1 was specified when the program was stored on the tape cartridge, then you must specify that file by using a hex number during the ~" .. entry of the commands given above. Step 4 specifies file 1 with the hex byte 0001. This should be changed --/ to properly identify the file used on the tape cartridge. Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-111 General Problems and Service Hints • If the forms are jamming, tearing, or feeding incorrectly: There might be incorrect clearance between the chain guide and the cover on the forms tractor unit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (325). The paper deflector might be too close to the platen. The deflector is held up by four prongs (two prongs on each side); these prongs should be formed down so the deflector rests On the flat springs between the pressure rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (320). The cut forms guide might not be flipped back as it should be (on old style machines) when yOu use continuous forms. The cover might not be aligned properly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen. There should be a minimum of 0.008 inches (0.20 mm) clearance between the ribbon shield and the platen when the copy control dial is set at O. Refer to the 5103 MIM (366). Forms might be thicker than' the allowed maximum of 0.018 inches (0.46 mm). Refer to the Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488. The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with the platen and might not be fully seated at all four mounting points. Improper se8tingis usually caused by a twisted forms tractor unit. If the forms tractor unit is stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Ensure that the forms are inserted correctly. Refer to BASIC Reference Guide, SA21-9217 orAPL Reference Guide, SA21-9213 for the method of inserting forms. The forms feeding might be improved if you remove the cut forms guide and route the forms over the printer cover rather than over the plastic rollers. • If the forms feed fails to index correctly: There might be mechanical binds in the platen gears, the idler gear, the forms motor/emitter assembly, or the forms tractor unit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (324, 326, 327, 328, 329, or 330). -The idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter assembly might be broken. -The forms emitter assembly might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). The forms feed amplifier might be defective. The forms feed amplifier might be located on a small card either mounted on the fOrms motor/emitter assembly or mounted on the printer adapter card. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). The end of forms switch might be defective or out of adjustment, or it might have loose wires on the terminals. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334). Card A1B1 might be defective. Refer to the 5103 MIM (304). • If the form feeds continuously: This problem usually pertains to the 5100. The forms feed motor in the printer will not advance unless it receives drive pulses from the 5100. Shorted or open signal lines in the 5103 will not cause continuous indexing. • If there are extra line spaces or the forms space or skip too far: The 5103 requires 16 stepper motor pulses to advance one line space. If the form advances more than one complete line space, the problem is in the 5100. If the form advances part of a line space, the forms emitter might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). There might be too much play in the gear train. Refer to the 5103 MIM (327). • If the form creeps and causes variable line spacing: There might be too much play in the gear train. Refer to the 5103 MIM (327). The forms emitter might be out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). Be sure to use the 5103 M I M at level 2 or later for the correct adjustment. The forms tractor unit might not be mounted securely. • If the form runs backwards: The forms emitter might be out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). I ,..-, "' . ./ ",-j 3-112 • If the printed line is skewed or crooked: The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with the platen and might not be fully seated at all four mounting points. a. Improper seating is usually caused by a twisted forms tractor unit. If the forms tractor unit is stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover (- and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. b. There might be interference between the printer cover and the forms tractor unit which does not allow the forms tractor unit to seat completely. Refer to the 5103 MIM (310). ( • If the ribbon jams: The ribbon shield might not be installed correctly and the ribbon might not be tracking below the opening in the shield. Readjust the shield to obtain a minimum clearance of 0.007 inches (0.18 mm) between the print head and the shield at the bottom. Refer to the 5103 MIM (366). Check for proper tracking of the ribbon through the ribbon feed rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (376). The ribbon should not be more than 0.015 inches (0.39 mm) above the feed rolls. If the ribbon is too far above the feed rolls, one of the following might be the cause: a. The feed rolls might not be adjusted properly. ( They should be the same height and not cocked. b. The print head cover might be hitting the cable near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left side of the cover to rise and lift the ribbon off the print head. If this condition exists, cut a small piece from the cover where it hits the cable. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). c. The ribbon box might be positioned too low. To raise the ribbon box, loosen the two screws that hold the ribbon box to the carrier (one screw on the left side and one screw in the bottom of the box). Then raise the box for proper tracking and tighten the screws. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). The ribbon might be sticking to the feed rolls. Remove and clean the feed rolls. Refer to the 5103 MIM (374). (-- Check for metal spacers between the feed rolls and the feed roll carrier. There should be a spacer at both the top and the bottom of the feed roll. Replace the feed rolls if both spacers are not installed. Refer to the 5103 MIM (376). Ensure that the print wires do not protrude more than 0.002 inches (0.051 mm) beyond the face of the print head. Improper setting of the copy control dial can lead to ribbon jams. The dial should be set for a good print quality on the last copy and no smudging on the first copy. The numbers on the dial do not correspond to the number of parts in the form. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). • If the printer fails to print or the print head fails to move: The end of forms switch might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334). The print emitter or print emitter pickup might be defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and 341). The forms feed might not have indexed after the last print line. Refer to the service hints above labeled If the Forms Feed Fails to Index Correctly. The copy control dial might not be correctly set for the thickness of the copy. The print head to platen clearance might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360). There might be a short circuit between the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). The only place the two should join is at the plastic pads. • Overprinting: Overprinting occurs if a print emitter error is detected while a line is being printed. If no error occurs and the printed data is correct and in the proper format, check for a print emitter or a print emitter pickup that is defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and 341). Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-113 • Light printing: The copy control dial might not be set correctly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). The ribbon might need to be replaced. -The clearance between the platen and the print head might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360). There might not be enough tension on the two print head springs. There should be 700 to 900 grams of tension at the tip of the print head near the print wires. This measurement should be taken with the platen removed and the print head near the center of the machine. Check for mechanical binding, sticking, or interference that would keep the print head from moving all the way forward toward the platen. Especially check to ensure that the print head cable does not interfere. The ribbon might not be advancing. Check for broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches, and misalignment of the ribbon drive gears. Check to ensure that the ribbon feed roll release knob is in the proper position. Refer to the 5103 MIM (301). If one end of the printed line is darker than the other, check the A-frame alignment. Also check for a bent platen shaft. Refer to the 5103 MIM (333). 3-114 • If every other line prints light: -One of the ribbon drive lines might be broken. Refer to 5103 MIM (301). -One of the ribbon drive clutches might be defective. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). • If the left margin is uneven: -The left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (343). Check the adjustments of the print emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302, 340, and 341). • If all the print wires fire in the left margin area: Replace the print emitter pickup. Refer to 5103 MIM (302 and 341). If part of the character in print position 1 is missing: The left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to the 5103 MIM (343). -Check the adjustments of the print emitter and print emitter pickup. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302, 340, and 341). • Broken print wires: -The following might cause breakage of the print wires: a. Improper setting of the copy control dial for the thickness of the forms used. b. Printing over the perforations, the feed holes, or the edge of the forms. c. Ribbon jams, which can cause the print wires to catch on the ribbon and break the wires. Ensure that fixes or engineering changes for ribbon jams are installed. • If the print head carrier stops when it approaches the right side: Ensure that the belt clamp does not contact the print head stepper motor when the print head carrier is moved to the extreme right. Refer to the 5103 MIM (302). • If the 24 Vdc supply voltage is too high: Replace card AlA 1 and the transistor Q 1. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). • If intermittent problems exist which are caused by poor grounding: Proper grounding is necessary for proper operation of the printer. Check the following list to help find intermittent problems: a. Ensure that the customer has provided the proper grounding for the 5100 (the green wire goes to ground). b. Ensure that the I/O signal cables have a good ground at the 5100. c. Ensure that the forms tractor unit is set securely on the printer. d. Ensure that the wire forms rack is electrically connected to the printer frame. A resistance of ( 100K ohms or less between the forms rack and the printer frame is acceptable. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300). e. It may be necessary to ground the forms rack to the printer with a ground wire. f. Check for electrical noise generated from other machines in the area, or for electrically noisy machines connected to the same AC line as the 5100 computer. • If printing intermittently stops: Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for the +5Vdc supply to the printer. The printer might not operate if this capacitor is not in the circuit. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). Check for the following: a. Capacitor C4 might be open. b. The wire betweeen C4 and test point A 1 might be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp. c. The land pattern between test point A 1 and test point V4 might be open. d. The wire between capacitor C4 and test point 4F might be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp. e. The land pattern between test point 4F and test point G6 might be open. Refer to the 5103 MIM (386). The circuit card A 1 A 1 contains most of the control circuits forthe printer. This card may be replaced in an attempt to fix intermittent problems. Refer to the 5103 MIM (303). ( Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-11& 3-116 This page intentionally left blank. INTRODUCTION 4-3 I/O Devices 4-3 The 5103 Printer 4-3 f~ The 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit 4-3 Features 4-3 Serial I/O Adapter Feature 4-3 Asynchronous Communications Feature 4-3 Katakana Feature . 4-4 Models 4-4 ( Functional Units 4-4 Keyboard 4-4 Display Adapter Card 4-4 Controller 4-4 Storage. 4-4 Base I/O Card . 4-4 I/O Cable Driver 4-4 Microprogramming 4-4 INTERNAL OPERATION OF THE 5100 . 4-5 5100 Internal Operation Diagram 4-6 5100 Data Flow and Parity Checking 4-7 Keyboard and Control Panel 4-9 Switches and Controls 4-9 Lights. 4-10 Keyboard Data Flow . 4-10 Keyboard Operation 4-10 Keyboard Code Translation 4-10 ( Key Functions 4-11 Keyboard Error Checking 4-12 Microprogramming 4-12 CONTROLLER 4-15 5100 Controller Data Flow 4-15 5100 Controller Description 4-16 Storage Read Bus and Storage Write Bus 4-16 Data Bus In 4-16 Data Bus Out 4-16 Storage Address Bus 4-16 Internal Controller Organization 4-16 Machine Cycles 4-17 Interrupts 4-17 Error Checking . 4-18 I/O Data Flow Control 4-19 ( Read Only Storage 4-19 Read/Write Storage 4-23 Storage Data Flow 4-25 Storage Address Register 4-26 Storage Read Bus 4-26 Storage Write Bus 4-26 Storage Error Checking 4-26 Base I/O Card . 4-26 (~ I/O Cable Driver Card 4-27 TAPE 4-28 Tape Unit Overview 4-28 Tape Data Flow 4-29 Tape Operations 4-29 Tape Drive Components . 4-29 ( Tape Cartridge . 4-31 Tape Writing and Formatting 4-32 Contents Tracks 4-33 Files 4-33 Records. 4-34 Tape Position Markers 4-37 Tape Motion 4-38 Forward Tape Motion 4-38 Reverse Tape Motion 4-38 Operations 4-38 Mark 4-38 Find 4-39 Read 4-39 Write 4-39 Rewind 4-39 Backspace. 4-39 Tape Adapter . 4-40 Tape Adapter I/O Lines 4-41 Error Checking 4-44 DISPLAY. 4-45 Display Adapter . 4-45 Display Adapter Controls 4-46 TV Monitor. 4-49 POWER 4-50 AC Power Box 4-50 Power Supply PC Board 4-51 DC Power Distribution . 4-51 Power Supply Protection 4-51 Referenced Voltage 4-51 5100 OPERATIONS 4-52 Power On Procedure, Initialization, and Bring-up Diagnostic 4-52 I/O Operation and Data Transfer from Keyboard to Display and Printer 4-52 Contents 4-1